SYLLABUS

Subject—Science
Class—X
Month Text-Book Subject-Matter Period of Period of Practical
Teaching Revision Work
April Science Ch. 1 : Chemical Reactions and Equations 7 1
Class-10 Ch.10: Light : Reflection and Refraction 6 1
(Reflection of Light)
Ch. 6 : Life Process (Nutrition or Respir- 5 1
ation System)
Exp. : To study the displacement reaction 1
by copper sulphate (CuSO4)
solution and iron nails.
May Science Ch. 2 : Acids, Bases and Salts 5 2
Class-10 (Chemical Merits of Acid and Base)
Ch.10 : Light : Reflection and Refraction 6 2
(Refraction of Light)
Ch. 6 : Life Processes (Transportation 6
System, Excretion System)
Exp. : To study the starches of different 2 1
substances with the help of iodine
solution.
June Summer Vacation
July Science Ch. 2 : Acids, Bases and Salts 5 1
Class-10 (Knowledge in relation of Salt or pH)
Ch.11 : Human Eye and Colourful World 7 1
Ch. 7 : Control and Coordination 7
Exp. : To study the laws of reflection with 1 1
the help of a mirror.
Exp. : To classify the different substances 1
into acid or base on the basis of pH
test.
August Science Ch. 3 : Metals and Non-metals 4 2
Class-10 Ch.12: Electricity 4 2
Ch. 8 : How do Organisms Reproduce? 4 2
Exp. : To study the method of conduction 2
(method of heat propagation) in
metals.
Exp. : To prepare the model of solar 2
cooker.
September Science Ch. 3 : Metals and Non-metals 4 1
Class-10 Ch. 12: Electricity 4 1
Ch. 8 : How do Organisms Reproduce? 4 1
Exp. : To study the different parts of the 1
flower.
October Science Ch. 4 : Carbon and its Compounds 5 1 2
Class-10 Ch.13: Magnetic Effects of Electric Current 5 1
Ch. 9 : Heredity and Evolution 5 1
Exp. : To study the laws of refraction by 1
a glass slab.
November Science Ch. 4 : Carbon and its Compounds 5 1 2
Class-10 Ch.13: Magnetic Effects of Electric Current 5 1
Ch.15: Our Environment 5 1
Exp. : To verify Ohm’s Law experimentally. 1
Exp. : To study the properties of an 1 2
electromagnet in laboratory.
December Science Ch. 5 : Periodic Classification of Elements 4 1 3
Class-10 (Classification of Elements, Periodic
Table of Mendeleev)
Ch.14: Sources of Energy 4 1
Ch.16: Management of Natural Resources 4 1
Exp. : To identify soft and hard water. 1
Exp. : Draw a chart of 5 step food chain 1
and study the flow of energy.
Exp. : To study the pattern of magnetic 1
lines of force with the help of a bar
magnet and iron filings/iron powder.
Winter Vacation
January Science Ch. 5 : Periodic Classification of Elements 2 1 4
Class-10 (Modern Periodic Table) 1
Ch.14: Sources of Energy 2 1
Ch.16: Management of Natural Resources 2 1
Exp. : To study saponification reaction for 1
the preparation of soap.
Exp. : To study the human brain with the 1
help of chart/model.
Exp. : To make models of different carbon 1
compounds.
February Sci. Class-10 Revision
March Exams and Valuation
 SYLLABUS
Subject—Science
Class—X
Month Text-Book Subject-Matter Period of Period of Practical
Teaching Revision Work
April Science Ch. 1 : Chemical Reactions and Equations 7 1
Class-10 Ch.10: Light : Reflection and Refraction 6 1
(Reflection of Light)
Ch. 6 : Life Process (Nutrition or Respir- 5 1
ation System)
Exp. : To study the displacement reaction 1
by copper sulphate (CuSO4)
solution and iron nails.
May Science Ch. 2 : Acids, Bases and Salts 5 2
Class-10 (Chemical Merits of Acid and Base)
Ch.10 : Light : Reflection and Refraction 6 2
(Refraction of Light)
Ch. 6 : Life Processes (Transportation 6
System, Excretion System)
Exp. : To study the starches of different 2 1
substances with the help of iodine
solution.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 3

CHEMISTRY
CHEMISTRY

1 CHEMICAL REACTIONS AND EQUATIONS

QUATIONS

SCIENTIFIC TERMS
1. Chemical reactions : Reactions/Changes which are accompanied with change in chemical
composition of the *substance(s). Or
A change in which one or more chemical elements or compounds form new compound(s).
2. Chemical equation : When a chemical change/reaction is represented in the form of symbols
and formulae, it is called a chemical equation.
3. Skeletal chemical equation : An unbalanced chemical equation is called a skeletal chemical
equation.
4. Balanced chemical equation : A chemical equation with same number of atoms of each element/
type on reactants as well as products side.
5. Fermentation : The conversion of complex organic compounds into simple compounds under
anaerobic conditions by enzymes/microbes.
6. Respiration : The process of oxidation of glucose (food) to release energy in the cells/body.
7. Reactants : The substances which react with each other to form new substances (elements/
compounds).
8. Products : The substances (elements/compounds) formed as a result of a chemical change.
9. Combination reactions : The reactions in which a single product is formed from two or more
reactants.
10. Decomposition reactions : The reactions in which a single reactant/substance forms more than
one product/substance.
11. Displacement reactions : The reactions in which an atom or group of atoms displaces an atom
or group of atoms from another substances which is generally a compound are called displacement
reactions.
12. Double displacement reactions : The reactions in which there is an exchange of ions between
the reactants are called double displacement reactions.
13. Exothermic reactions : Chemical reactions which are accompanied by release of heat energy.
14. Endothermic reactions : The chemical reactions which are accompanied by absorption of energy
are called endothermic reactions.
15. Oxidation reaction : If a substance gains oxygen or loses hydrogen during a reaction, it is said
to be oxidised and the reaction is called a oxidation reaction.
16. Reduction reaction : If a substance loses oxygen or gains hydrogen during a reaction, it is said
to be reduced and the reaction is called a reduction reaction.
17. Redox (Oxidation-reduction) reactions : The reactions in which both oxidation and reduction
occur simultaneously/at the same time are called redox reactions.
contd...
* The term ‘substance’ is generally used for elements and compounds.
3
4 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

18. Corrosion : The weakening of metals (substances) due to environmental effect is called corrosion.
19. Rancidity : The change in smell and taste of food articles containing fats and oils due to their
oxidation, is called rancidity and the food becomes rancid.
20. Thermal decomposition : When a decomposition reaction is carried out by heating, it is called
a thermal decomposition reaction.
21. Electrolysis : The process of decomposition of a substance (say water) under influence of electric
current is called electrolysis. Or
The production of a chemical reaction by passing electric current through an electrolyte.
22. Precipitation reaction : Any reaction that produces a precipitate can be called precipitation
reaction.
23. Antioxidants : Substances that slow the rate of oxidation reactions.
24. Oxidising agents : The substances which get reduced.
25. Reducing agents : The substances which get oxidised.

CHAPTER AT A GLANCE
1. In nature there occur thousands of reactions, some of them are physical and others are chemical.
2. Physical reactions (changes) are those in which, there occur change in physical state only and chemical
composition of the substance(s) remains unchanged.
3. Chemical reactions are the changes in which chemical composition of the substance(s) gets changed
and new substances are formed.
4. During a chemical reaction there can be a (i) change in state, (ii) change in colour, (iii) evolution of a
gas, (iv) change in temperature, etc.
5. A chemical change written in the form of chemical formulae and symbols is called a chemical equation.
6. The chemical equations need to be balanced so that there are same number of atoms of each element
on the reactant as well as product side.
7. Chemical reactions are of following types depending on their nature :
(i) Combination reactions, (ii) Decomposition reactions, (iii) Displacement reactions, (iv) Double
displacement reactions and (v) Redox reactions.
8. A chemical equation provides lot of information about a chemical change. It can also be made more
informative by denoting the conditions under which a reaction takes place, the physical state of reactants
and products, the energy changes, etc.
9. Electrolysis of water is a decomposition reaction in which water is decomposed into hydrogen and
oxygen under influence of electric current.
10. There are certain reactions which take place only in presence of light. Such reactions are called
photochemical reactions.
11. The more reactive elements/metals can displace less reactive elements from their salt solutions, such
reactions are called displacement reactions.
12. If a substance gains oxygen or loses hydrogen, it is said to be oxidised and the reaction is said to be
oxidation reaction.
13. If a substance loses oxygen and gains hydrogen, it is said to be reduced and the reaction is called a
reduction reaction.
14. The substances (say metals) get weakened due to environmental effect, the process is known as
corrosion. It causes lot of losses to iron railings, bridges, car, ship bodies, etc.
15. When fats/oils get oxidised, they become rancid and their smell and taste change.
16. The substances which prevent oxidation are called antioxidants and are added to food articles to
prevent their oxidation/spoilage.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 5

TEXTUAL QUESTIONS

Questions on Article 1.1 (PAGE–6)

Q.1. Why should a magnesium ribbon be cleaned before burning in air?
Ans. Magnesium is a reactive metal. When exposed to air it readily reacts with O2 present in air. So, a
layer of magnesium oxide is generally present over it. Therefore, this layer has to be removed/cleaned before
burning magnesium ribbon in air.
Q.2. Write the balanced equation for the following chemical reactions :
(i) Hydrogen + Chlorine  Hydrogen chloride
(ii) Barium chloride + Aluminium sulphate  Barium sulphate + Aluminium chloride [2018 (Set-A)]
(iii) Sodium + Water  Sodium hydroxide + Hydrogen.
Ans. (i) H2 + Cl2  2HCl
Hydrogen Chlorine Hydrogen chloride
(ii) 3BaCl2 + Al2(SO4)3  3BaSO4 + 2AlCl3
Barium chloride Aluminium sulphate Barium sulphate Aluminium chloride
(iii) 2Na + 2H2O  2NaOH + H2
Sodium Water Sodium hydroxide Hydrogen
Q.3. Write a balanced chemical equation with state symbols for the following reactions:
(i) Solutions of barium chloride and sodium sulphate in water react to give insoluble barium
sulphate and the solution of sodium chloride.
(ii) Sodium hydroxide solution (in water) reacts with hydrochloric acid solution (in water) to
produce sodium chloride solution and water.
Ans. (i) BaCl2(aq) + Na2SO4(aq)  BaSO4(s) + 2NaCl(aq)
Barium chloride Sodium sulphate Barium sulphate Sodium chloride
(ii) NaOH(aq) + HCl(aq)  NaCl(aq) + H2O(l)
Sodium hydroxide Hydrochloric acid Sodium chloride Water

Questions on Article 1.2.2 (PAGE–10)

Q.1. A solution of a substance ‘X’ is used for white washing.
(i) Name the substance ‘X’ and write its formula.
(ii) Write the reaction of the substance ‘X’ named in (i) above with water.
Ans. (i) The substance ‘X’ is quick lime. Its chemical name is calcium oxide and its formula is CaO.
(ii) CaO(s) + H2O(l)  Ca(OH)2(aq)
Calcium oxide Water Calcium hydroxide

Q.2. Why is the amount of gas collected in one of the

test tubes in activity 1.7 (Text book) double of the amount Oxygen Plastic jug
collected in the other? Name this gas. Hydrogen
Ans. Activity 1.7 (Text book page no. 9) involves/depicts Water
electrolysis of water. Chemical formula of water is H2O. It is Water
Graphite Rubber
made of hydrogen and oxygen. On electrolysis the amount of rod deterrent
gas collected in one of the test tubes is double the amount of Anode Cathode
gas collected in the other because by volume water contains
hydrogen and oxygen in ratio of 2 : 1 respectively as shown in
the following equation :
Key Battery
2H2O(l)  2H2(g) + O2(g)
Fig. 1.1. : Depicts electrolysis of water
2 volume 2 volume 1 volume
6 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Questions on Article 1.3 (PAGE–13)

Q.1. Why does the colour of copper sulphate solution change when an iron nail is dipped in it ?
Ans. When copper sulphate solution reacts with iron, then following reaction takes place : [2018 (Set-C)]
CuSO4(aq) + Fe(s)  FeSO4(aq) + Cu(s)
Copper sulphate Iron Ferrous sulphate Copper
Copper sulphate solution is blue in colour. Iron being more reactive than copper, displaces copper from
its salt solution. So, the blue colour fades away due to formation of ferrous sulphate (which is light green in
colour).
Q.2. Give an example of a double displacement reaction other than the one given in activity 1.10
(Text book).
Ans. Example of a double displacement reaction is :
BaCl2 + ZnSO4  ZnCl2 + BaSO4
Q.3. Identify the substances that are oxidised and the substances that are reduced in the following
reactions :
(i) 4Na(s) + O2 (g)  2Na2O(s)
(ii) CuO(s) + H2(g)  Cu(s) + H2O (l) [H.B.S.E. 2019 (Set-A, B)]
Ans. (i) 4Na(s) + O2(g)  2Na2O(s)
Sodium Oxygen Sodium oxide
Sodium (Na) has been oxidised to Na2O and oxygen (O2) has been reduced to Na2O.
(ii) CuO(s) + H2(g)  Cu(s) + H2O(l)
Copper oxide Hydrogen Copper Hydrogen oxide (Water)
In the above reaction copper oxide (CuO) has been reduced to copper (Cu) and hydrogen (H2) has been
oxidised to water (H2O).

TEXTUAL EXERCISES
Q.1. Which of the statements about the reaction below are incorrect?
2PbO(s) + C(s)  2Pb(s) + CO2(g)
(a) Lead is getting reduced (b) Carbon dioxide is getting oxidised
(c) Carbon is getting oxidised (d) Lead oxide is getting reduced
(i) (a) and (b), (ii) (a) and (c), (iii) (a), (b) and (c), (iv) all
Ans. (ii) (a) and (c)
Q.2. Fe2O3 + 2Al  Al2O3 + 2Fe
The above reaction is an example of a
(a) combination reaction (b) double displacement reaction
(c) decomposition reaction (d) displacement reaction
Ans. (d) displacement reaction
Q.3. What happens when dilute hydrochloric acid is added to iron filings? Tick the correct
answer. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-A)]
(a) Hydrogen gas and iron chloride are produced
(b) Chlorine gas and iron hydroxide are produced
Chemical Reactions and Equations 7

(c) No reaction takes place

(d) Iron salt and water are produced
Ans. (a) Hydrogen gas and iron chloride are produced :
Fe + 2HCl (dil.)  FeCl2 + H2
Q.4. What is a balanced chemical equation? Why should chemical equation be balanced?
Ans. Balanced chemical equation : A chemical equation in which the number of atoms of each
element are same on the reactant side and on the product side.
For example : 2NaOH + H2SO4  Na2SO4 + 2H2O
A chemical equation is balanced because atoms can neither be created nor be destroyed in accordance
with law of conservation of mass.
For example: If we write the above equation in skeletal form :
NaOH + H2SO4  Na2SO4 + H2O
Here, on the product side one atom of sodium (Na) is more which gives false indication that an atom of
sodium has been produced in the reaction, which is wrong. So, we need to balance a chemical equation.
Q.5. Translate the following statements into chemical equations and then balance them :
(a) Hydrogen gas combines with nitrogen to form ammonia.
(b) Hydrogen sulphide gas burns in air to give water and sulphur dioxide.
(c) Barium chloride reacts with aluminium sulphate to give aluminium chloride and a precipitate
of barium sulphate.
(d) Potassium metal reacts with water to give potassium hydroxide and hydrogen gas.
Ans. (a) Skeletal equation : N2 (g) + H2 (g)  NH3 (g)
Balanced equation : N2 (g) + 3H2 (g)  2NH3 (g)
(b) Skeletal equation : H2S(g) + O2 (g) (air)  H2O + SO2 (g)
Balanced equation : 2H2S(g) + 3O2 (g)  2H2O(l) + 2SO2 (g)
(c) Skeletal equation : Al2 (SO4)3 (s) + BaCl2 (aq)  AlCl3 (aq) + BaSO4
Balanced equation : Al2 (SO4)3 (s) + 3BaCl2 (aq)  2AlCl3 (aq) + 3BaSO4
(d) Skeletal equation : K(s) + H2O (l)  KOH (aq) + H2 (g)
Balanced equation : 2K(s) + 2H2O (l)  2KOH (g) + H2 (g)
Q.6. Balance the following chemical equations :
(a) HNO3 + Ca (OH)2  Ca (NO3)2 + H2O
(b) NaOH + H2SO4  Na2SO4 + H2O
(c) NaCl + AgNO3  AgCl + NaNO3
(d) BaCl2 + H2SO4  BaSO4 + HCl
Ans. (a) 2HNO3 + Ca (OH)2  Ca(NO3)2 + 2H2O
(b) 2NaOH + H2SO4  Na2SO4 + 2H2O
(c) NaCl + AgNO3  AgCl + NaNO3
(d) BaCl2 + H2SO4  BaSO4 + 2HCl
8 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.7. Write the balanced chemical equations for the following reactions :

Calcium carbonate + Water
(a) Calcium hydroxide + Carbon dioxide
(b) Zinc + Silver nitrate  Zinc nitrate + Silver
(c) Aluminium + Copper chloride  Aluminium chloride + Copper [H.B.S.E. 2018 (Set-D)]

Barium sulphate + Potassium chloride
(d) Barium chloride + Potassium sulphate
Ans. (a) Ca (OH)2 + CO2  CaCO3 + H2O
(b) Zn + 2AgNO3  Zn (NO3)2 + 2Ag
(c) 2Al + 3CuCl2  2AlCl3 + 3Cu
(d) BaCl2 + K2SO4  BaSO4 + 2KCl
Q.8. Write the balanced chemical equation for the following and identify the type of reaction in
each case :
(a) Potassium bromide (aq) + Barium iodide(aq)  Potassium iodide(aq) + Barium bromide(s)
(b) Zinc carbonate (s)  Zinc oxide (s) + Carbon dioxide (g)
(c) Hydrogen (g) + Chlorine (g)  Hydrogen chloride (g)
(d) Magnesium (s) + Hydrochloric acid (aq)  Magnesium chloride (aq) + Hydrogen (g)
Ans. (a) 2KBr (aq) + BaI2 (aq)  2KI (aq) + BaBr2 (s)
Type of reaction : Double displacement reaction.
(b) ZnCO3 (s)  ZnO (s) + CO2 (g)
Type of reaction : Decomposition reaction.
(c) H2 (g) + Cl2 (g)  2HCl (g)
Type of reaction : Combination reaction.
(d) Mg (s) + 2HCl (aq)  MgCl2 (aq) + H2 (g)
Type of reaction : Single displacement reaction.
Q.9. What does one mean by exothermic and endothermic reactions? Give examples.
Ans. Exothermic reactions : The reactions which are accompanied with release of heat energy are
called exothermic reactions.
Examples : C + O2  CO2 + Heat energy
(Coal)

Endothermic reactions : The reactions which take place by absorption/consumption of (heat) energy,
are called endothermic reactions. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-A)]
Examples : N2(g) + O2 (g) + Heat energy  2NO(g)
2AgBr(s)   2Ag + Br2(g)
Sunlight

Q.10. Why is respiration considered an exothermic reaction ? Explain.

Ans. Respiration means oxidation of glucose in the cells leading to its decomposition in a series of
reactions, carried out by enzymes present in the cells (and Mitochondria).
C6H12O6 + 6O2  6CO2 + 6H2O + Energy
The reaction is accompanied by release of energy (which is stored in the form of ATPs in the cells). So,
respiration is called an exothermic reaction.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 9

Q.11. Why are decomposition reactions called the opposite of combination reactions? Write
equations for these reactions.
Ans. Decomposition reactions are called opposite of combination reactions because in decomposition
reactions single reactant produces two or more substances whereas in combination reactions two or more
substances produce single product.
This can be explained from the following examples :
Combination reaction : 2H2 (g) + O2 (g)  2H2O (g) + Energy
Decomposition reaction : 2H2O (l) 2H2 (g) + O2 (g)
Q.12. Write one equation each for decomposition reactions where energy is supplied in the form
of heat, light or electricity. [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-B)]
Ans. Decomposition reactions requiring different form of energies are :

(i) CaCO3(s) CaO(s) + CO2(g)

Calcium carbonate

(ii) 2AgCl(s) 2Ag(s) + Cl2(g)

(iii) 2H2O(l) 2H2(g) + O2(g)

Q.13. What is the difference between displacement and double displacement reactions ? Write
equations for these reactions. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-C)]
Ans. Displacement reactions : The reactions in which an atom or a group of atoms displaces an atom
or a group of atoms from a compound are called displacement reactions.
Examples : CuSO4(aq) + Fe(s)  FeSO4(aq) + Cu(s)
Here, iron displaces copper from copper sulphate solution.
FeSO4(aq) + Zn(s)  ZnSO4(aq) + Fe(s)
Double displacement reactions : Reactions in which there is an exchange of ions between the reactants
are called double displacement reactions.
Examples : Na2SO4(aq) + BaCl2(aq)  BaSO4(s) + 2NaCl
Sodium sulphate Barium chloride Barium sulphate Sodium chloride

BaCl2 (aq) + H2SO4 (aq)  BaSO4(s) + HCl (aq)

Barium chloride Sulphuric acid Barium sulphate Hydrochloric acid
Q.14. In the refining of silver, the recovery of silver from silver nitrate solution involved
displacement by copper metal. Write down the reaction involved.
Ans. Cu (s) + 2AgNO3 (aq) Cu (NO3)2 (aq) + 2Ag (s)
Q.15. What do you mean by a precipitation reaction? Explain by giving examples.
Ans. Precipitation reaction : Any reaction that produces a precipitate of white colour is called a
precipitation reaction.
Examples : Na2SO4(aq) + BaCl2(aq)  BaSO4(s) + 2NaCl(aq)
Sodium sulphate Barium chloride Barium sulphate Sodium chloride

Pb(NO3)2(aq) + 2KI(aq)  2KNO3(aq) + PbI2

Lead nitrate Potassium iodide Potassium nitrate Lead iodide
10 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.16. Explain the following in terms of gain or loss of oxygen with two examples each.
(a) Oxidation, (b) Reduction.
Ans. (a) Oxidation : If a substance gains oxygen or loses hydrogen during a reaction, that the reaction
is termed as oxidation.
Examples : C + O2  CO2 + Heat
Carbon Oxygen Carbon dioxide

2Cu + O2  2CuO
Copper Oxygen Copper(II) oxide

(b) Reduction : If a substance loses oxygen or gains hydrogen during a reaction, that the reaction is said
to be reduction.
Examples : ZnO + C  Zn + CO
Zinc oxide Coke/Carbon Zinc Carbon monoxide

CuO + H2 Cu + H2O
Copper oxide Hydrogen Copper Water

Copper oxide has been reduced to copper.

Q.17. A shiny brown coloured element ‘X’ on heating in air becomes black in colour. Name the
element ‘X’ and the black coloured compound formed.
Ans. Element ‘X’ is copper and the black coloured compound is copper oxide. Because copper is shiny
brown coloured element which on reaction with oxygen (present in air) form black coloured compound,
copper oxide. The reaction can be written as :
2Cu + O2  2CuO
Copper Oxygen Copper oxide
(Brown)
Q.18. Why do we apply paint on iron articles ?
Ans. Iron is a reactive metal. It readily reacts with oxygen gas present in air in the presence of moisture
[H2O (g)]. A brown coloured powder (rust) is formed on the surface of iron articles. This process is known as
rusting of iron or corrosion. It can be written as :
4Fe + xH2O + 3O2  2Fe2O3 · xH2O
Therefore, to avoid rusting of iron, we apply paint on iron articles.
Q.19. Oil and fat containing food items are flushed with nitrogen. Why?
Ans. The oil and fat containing food items are flushed with nitrogen because nitrogen is an inert gas. It
prevents such food substances from getting oxidised. So, it prevents spoilage of such food articles.
Q.20. Explain the following terms with one example each.
(a) Corrosion, (b) Rancidity.
Ans. (a) Corrosion : The weakening of metal articles due to environmental effect is called corrosion.
Oxygen(O2) present in the air generally reacts with metals forming their oxides. Acidic gases such as SO2,
SO3, NO2, etc. also react with metals and make them weak.
Example : Rusting of iron is a common example of corrosion.
(b) Rancidity : The change in colour, smell and taste of food articles containing fat/oil, when they are
left for long time is called rancidity. It occurs due to oxidation of food. The rancid food becomes unfit for
human consumption.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 11

Prevention of rancidity :
(i) Rancidity can be prevented by keeping the food in airtight containers.
(ii) Flushing the bags of such food articles with an inert gas like nitrogen gas. It prevents such food
articles from getting oxidised.
(iii) Use of antioxidants which slow down the rate of oxidation.

EXAMINATION BASED OTHER IMPORTANT QUESTIONS

I. Very Short-Answer Type Questions

A. Multiple Choice Questions
1. Burning of magnesium in air involves :
(A) oxidation of magnesium (B) reduction of magnesium
(C) precipitation of magnesium (D) none of these
Ans. (A) oxidation of magnesium
2. In a balanced equation
a Fe + b H2O  c Fe3O4 + d H2
The values of a, b, c and d respectively are :
(A) 2, 4, 1 and 4 (B) 4, 1, 4 and 3
(C) 3, 4, 1 and 4 (D) 3, 4, 4 and 1
Ans. (C) 3, 4, 1 and 4
3. The following reaction
HCl (aq) + NaOH (aq)  NaCl (aq) + H2O (l) is a :
(A) redox reaction (B) neutralisation reaction
(C) decomposition reaction (D) precipitation reaction
Ans. (B) neutralisation reaction
4. Which of the following is a displacement reaction ?
(A) H2 + Cl2  2HCl (B) CaCO3  CaO + CO2
(C) Zn + H2SO4  ZnSO4 + H2 (D) CaO + H2O  Ca (OH)2
Ans. (C) Zn + H2SO4  ZnSO4 + H2
5. The process of oxidation involves :
(A) gain of electrons (B) loss of electrons
(C) addition of hydrogen (D) removal of oxygen
Ans. (B) loss of electrons
6. CaCO3(s)  Heat
 CaO(s) + CO2(g), this reaction is :
(A) displacement reaction (B) Double displacement
(C) combination reaction (D) decomposition reaction
Ans. (D) decomposition reaction
7. Fe2O3 + 2Al  Al2O3 + 2Fe
which is reduced in above reaction? [H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-C)]
(A) Fe2O3 (B) Al
(C) Al2O3 (D) none of these
Ans. (A) Fe2O3
12 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

8. 2Pb(NO3)2(s)  Heat

 2PbO(s)+4NO2(g)+O2(g). This reaction is :
 [H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-B)]
(A) Displacement (B) Thermal decomposition
(C) Combination (D) Exothermic
Ans. (B) Thermal decomposition
9. Out of Cu, Ag, Fe and Zn, the metal which can displace all others from their salt solution is :
(A) Ag (B) Cu
(C) Zn (D) Fe
Ans. (C) Zn
10. The substances that take part in a chemical reaction are called :
(A) compounds (B) reactants
(C) products (D) reactants and products
Ans. (B) reactants
11. Redox reactions involve :
(A) both oxidation as well as reduction (B) only oxidation
(C) only reduction (D) neither oxidation nor reduction
Ans. (A) both oxidation as well as reduction
12. Zinc can displace silver, copper and iron from their salt solution because :
(A) Zn is the most reactive than these three (B) Zn is the least reactive than these three
(C) Zn does not occur in free state in nature (D) the melting point of Zn is low
Ans. (A) Zn is the most reactive than these three
13. Carbon dioxide reacts with carbon to form carbon monoxide. The reaction type is :
(A) displacement reaction (B) combination reaction
(C) decomposition reaction (D) double displacement reaction
Ans. (B) combination reaction
14. In the equation CuO + H2  Cu + H2O, the reducing agent is :
(A) CuO (B) Cu
(C) H2 (D) H2O
Ans. (C) H2
15. What is formula of slaked lime? [H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-D)]
(A) CaO (B) Ca(OH)2
(C) CaCO3 (D) CaSO4
Ans. (B) Ca(OH)2
16. Name the exothermic reaction, out of the following :
(A) C + O2  CO2 + Heat (B) N2 + O2  2NO – Heat
(C) CaCO3  CaO + CO2 – Heat (D) none of these
Ans. (A) C + O2  CO2 + Heat
17. Which one of the following is an endothermic reaction ?
(A) CaCO3  CaO + CO2 – Heat (B) N2 + O2  2NO – Heat
(C) 2NaCl  2Na + Cl2 – Heat (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
Chemical Reactions and Equations 13

18. Which is a simple displacement reaction in the following ?

(A) Zn + CuSO4  ZnSO4 + Cu (B) 2Fe + 3Cl2  2FeCl3
(C) CaO + H2O  Ca (OH)2 (D) N2 + 3H2  2NH3
Ans. (A) Zn + CuSO4  ZnSO4 + Cu
19. Oil and fat containing food items are flushed with nitrogen. Why ? [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-B)]
(A) To prevent their reduction. (B) To prevent their oxidation.
(C) To Protect them from insects. (D) To protect them from rodents.
Ans. (B) To prevent their oxidation.
20. Which of the following is most informative equation ?
(A) BaCl2 + ZnSO4  ZnCl2 + BaSO4
(B) BaCl2 (aq) + ZnSO4 (aq)  ZnCl2 + BaSO4
(C) BaCl2 (aq) + ZnSO4 (aq)  ZnCl2 (aq) + BaSO4 (s)
(D) BaCl2 (aq) + ZnSO4 (aq)  ZnCl2 (aq) + BaSO4 (s)
Ans. (D) BaCl2 (aq) + ZnSO4 (aq)  ZnCl2 (aq) + BaSO4 (s)
21. Which of the following is not a balanced equation ?
(A) Zn + 2HCl  ZnCl2 + H2 (B) Mg + H2SO4  MgSO4 + H2
(C) CaO + H2O  Ca(OH)2 (D) Fe + Cl2 FeCl3
Ans. (D) Fe + Cl2 FeCl3
22. The formula of ferric oxide is :
(A) FeO (B) Fe2O3
(C) FeO3 (D) Fe2O
Ans. (B) Fe2O3
23. The formula of Calcium hydroxide is :
(A) Ca(OH)2 (B) Ca(OH)3
(C) CaOH (D) CaCO3
Ans. (A) Ca(OH)2
24. The metal protected by its oxide is :
(A) gold (B) silver
(C) aluminium (D) iron
Ans. (C) aluminium
25. Rancidity means :
(A) rottening of fruits and vegetables (B) oxidation of oily/fatty foods
(C) decomposition of foods by microbes (D) preservation of food
Ans. (B) oxidation of oily/fatty foods
26. When mercury (II) oxide is heated strongly it decomposes to produce liquid mercury and oxygen,
the correct equation will be :
(A) 2HgO (s) 2Hg (l) + O2 (g) (B) HgO2 Hg (l) + O2 (g)
(C) 2Hg2O  4Hg (l) + O2 (g) (D) none of these
Ans. (A) 2HgO (s) 2Hg (l) + O2 (g)
14 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

27. The chemical reaction in which heat is evolved is a :

(A) endothermic reaction (B) decomposition reaction
(C) exothermic reaction (D) none of these
Ans. (C) exothermic reaction
28. Which type of reaction respiration is ? [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-A)]
(A) exothermic (B) endothermic
(C) combination (D) none of these
Ans. (A) exothermic
29. Oxidation does not involve :
(A) addition of oxygen (B) gain of electrons
(C) removal of hydrogen (D) loss of electrons
Ans. (B) gain of electrons
30. Reduction does not involve :
(A) gain of electrons (B) loss of electrons
(C) removal of oxygen (D) addition of hydrogen
Ans. (B) loss of electrons
31. Burning of coal/coke/carbon is a :
(A) combination reaction (B) exothermic reaction
(C) oxidation reaction (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
32. Which gas is used to prevent the food items from rancidity ?
(A) Oxygen (B) Hydrogen
(C) Nitrogen (D) Chlorine
Ans. (C) Nitrogen
33. Limewater Ca (OH)2 turns milky when we pass a gas through it. The gas is :
(A) carbon monoxide (B) carbon dioxide
(C) hydrogen (D) nitrogen
Ans. (B) carbon dioxide
34. Metal corrosion/rusting is a :
(A) oxidation reaction (B) reduction reaction
(C) displacement reaction (D) double displacement reaction
Ans. (A) oxidation reaction
35. The formula of Lead Nitrate is :
(A) PbNO2 (B) Pb(NO2)2
(C) PbNO3 (D) Pb(NO3)2
Ans. (D) Pb(NO3)2
36. The white coloured substance formed as a result of combustion of magnesium in air is :
(A) Mg3N2 (B) MgO
(C) Mg (D) none of these
Ans. (B) MgO
Chemical Reactions and Equations 15

37. The reaction between lead nitrate solution and potassium iodide solution is a :
(A) displacement reaction (B) double displacement reaction
(C) combination reaction (D) decomposition reaction
Ans. (B) double displacement reaction
38. Which of the following is exothermic reaction ? [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-D)]
(A) Decomposition of calcium carbonate by heat (B) Decomposition of silver chloride by sunlight
(C) Decomposition of vegetable matter into compost (D) Decomposition of lead nitrate by heat
Ans. (C) Decomposition of vegetable matter into compost
39. When we add water to calcium oxide (quick lime) the reaction which takes place is a/an :
(A) endothermic reaction (B) exothermic reaction
(C) oxidation reaction (D) redox reaction
Ans. (C) oxidation reaction
40. The reaction between calcium oxide and water to form calcium hydroxide is a :
(A) decomposition reaction (B) displacement reaction
(C) double displacement reaction (D) combination reaction
Ans. (D) combination reaction
41. Which gas when passed through slaked lime [calcium hydroxide, Ca (OH)2 ] turns it milky?
(A) carbon monoxide (B) carbon dioxide
(C) hydrogen sulphide (D) sulphur dioxide
Ans. (B) carbon dioxide
42. The colour of ferrous sulphate crystals (FeSO4 · 7H2O) is light green. This colour is due to presence
of water of crystallization. When we heat these crystals ferric oxide, sulphur dioxide and sulphur
trioxide are formed. The reaction is a :
(A) decomposition reaction (B) combination reaction
(C) displacement reaction (D) double displacement reaction
Ans. (A) decomposition reaction
Sunlight
43. 2AgBr(s)  2Ag(s)+Br2(g) [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-C)]
the above reaction is used in :
(A) Welding (B) Black & White photography
(C) White washing walls (D) To prevent corrosion
Ans. (B) Black & White photography
44. ZnO + C  Zn + CO, this reaction is :
(A) Oxidation (B) Reduction
(C) Corrosion (D) Redox
Ans. (B) Reduction
45. The decomposition of silver chloride into silver and chlorine can be easily carried out by using :
(A) heat energy (B) electrical energy
(C) light (photo) energy (D) chemical energy
Ans. (C) light (photo) energy
16 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

46. The reaction between sodium sulphate solution and barium chloride solution to form barium
sulphate and sodium chloride is a :
(A) double displacement reaction (B) precipitation reaction
(C) (A) and (B) both (D) displacement reaction
Ans. (C) (A) and (B) both
47. The formula of sodium sulphate is :
(A) Na2SO3 (B) Na2S
(C) Na2SO4 (D) Na2S2O3
Ans. (C) Na2SO4

B. One Word/Sentence Questions

Q.1. Write an indication of taking place a chemical reaction.
Ans. Change in the states of reactants and products.
Q.2. What is meant by chemical reaction?
Ans. A chemical reaction is a change which lead to formation of new substances.
Q.3. Define a chemical equation.
Ans. A chemical reaction represented in the form of symbols and formulae is called a chemical equation.
Q.4. Give one example of a chemical reaction characterised by evolution of a gas.
Ans. When zinc reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid, then evolution of H2 gas takes place.
Zn + 2HCl  ZnCl2 + H2 (g)
Q.5. Write chemical equation for reaction of potassium iodide solution and lead nitrate solution.
Ans. 2KI (aq) + Pb (NO3)2 (aq)  PbI2  + 2KNO3 (aq)
(ppt.)
Q.6. Give one example of a reaction characterised by a change in temperature.
Ans. When methane is burnt heat is produced.
CH4 + 2O2  CO2 + 2H2O + Heat
Q.7. Give one example of a reaction in which precipitates are formed.
Ans. When barium chloride solution reacts with dil sulphuric acid a white precipitate of barium sulphate
is formed.
BaCl2 (aq) + H2SO4 (aq)  BaSO4  + 2HCl (aq)
(ppt.)
Q.8. What colour change does take place when lemon juice is added to potassium permanganate
solution ?
Ans. The purple colour of potassium permanganate solution gets faded away due to oxidation.
Q.9. What happens when quick lime is treated with water?
Ans. Quick lime vigorously reacts with water and forms slaked lime.
CaO + H2O  Ca(OH)2
Quick lime Slaked lime
Q.10. Give chemical equation for reaction of zinc granules with dilute sulphuric acid.
Ans. Zn (s) + dil. H2SO4 (aq) ZnSO4 (s) + H2 (g)
Chemical Reactions and Equations 17

Q.11. State whether the following reaction is exothermic or endothermic?

2H2O (l)  2H2 (g) + O2 (g) – 6 kJ
Ans. It is an endothermic reaction as it is accompanied by absorption of energy.
Q.12. What does the symbol (aq) represent in a chemical equation ?
Ans. The symbol (aq) means aqueous, which means solution in water.
Q.13. What does the symbol means in a chemical equation?
Ans. The symbol  in a chemical equation means precipitates (solid substance formation in a liquid).
Q.14. Why is respiration considered as an exothermic reaction?
Ans. Because during respiration (oxidation of glucose in cells) energy is released.
Q.15. Give an example of an endothermic reaction in nature.
Ans. Photosynthesis is an endothermic reaction.
Q.16. What are combination reactions?
Ans. The chemical reactions in which two or more than two substances combine to form single product,
are called combination reactions.
Q.17. The reaction
CaO (s) + H2O (l)  Ca (OH)2 (aq)
is an example of which type of reaction?
Ans. The above reaction is an example of combination reaction.
Q.18. The following equation is an example of which type of reaction?
CaCO3 (s) CaO (s) + CO2 (g)
Ans. Decomposition reaction, because here single reactant for two products.
Q.19. Name the type of chemical reactions taking place during digestion of food.
Ans. During digestion, food is decomposed by action of enzymes into simple compound. So, the name
of reaction will be decomposition.
Q.20. Name the type of reaction :
2FeSO4  Fe2O3 + SO2 + SO3
Ans. Decomposition reaction.
Q.21. What are displacement reactions?
Ans. Those reactions in which a more reactive element displaces a less reactive element from a compound,
are called displacement reactions.
Q.22. Write an equation where an active metal displaces hydrogen from water.
Ans. 2Na + 2H2O  2NaOH + H2
Q.23. Give an example, where an active metal displaces hydrogen from dilute acids.
Ans. Zn + dil. 2HCl  ZnCl2 + H2
Q.24. Write a displacement reaction involving magnesium metal and copper sulphate solution.
Ans. Mg (s) + CuSO4 (aq)  MgSO4 (aq) + Cu (s)
Q.25. Name one metal which when placed in ferrous sulphate solution, discharges its green colour.
Write its chemical equation.
Ans. The metals reactive than iron (Mg, Zn, etc.) will discharge green colour of ferrous sulphate.
Zn (s) + FeSO4 (aq)  ZnSO4 (aq) + Fe (s)
18 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.26. A person by mistake stored a solution of ferrous sulphate in an aluminium vessel. After a
few days he noticed some holes in the vessel. What reaction could have taken place ?
Ans. 2Al (s) + 3FeSO4 (aq)  Al2 (SO4)3 + 3Fe
Aluminium is more reactive than iron, so it displaced iron from ferrous sulphate solution.
Q.27. Write the equation of electrolysis of alumina.
Ans. 2Al electrolysis of aluminium oxide (alumina) :
2Al2O3 
Electric current
 4Al + 3O2
Aluminium oxide Aluminium Oxygen
(Alumina in molten state)
Q.28. Write the chemical reaction of slaking of lime.
Ans. The chemical reaction of slaking of lime :
CaO + H2O  Ca(OH)2 + Heat
Calcium Oxide Water Calcium Hydroxide
Q.29. Write the chemical equation of heating of potassium chlorate.
Ans. 2KClO3 (s) 2KCl (s) + 3O2 (g)
Potassium chlorate Potassium chloride Oxygen
Q.30. Give an equation showing double displacement reaction.
Ans. AgNO3(aq) + KBr(aq)  AgBr + KNO3(aq)
Silver nitrate Potassium bromide Silver bromide Potassium nitrate
Q.31. Is the following reaction possible? If not, then why?
Cu (s) + ZnSO4 (aq)  CuSO4 (aq) + Zn (s)
Ans. No, this reaction is not possible because copper is less reactive than zinc. So, it cannot replace zinc
from zinc sulphate solution.
Q.32. Give one example of a precipitation reaction.
Ans. NaCl(aq) + AgNO3(aq)  AgCl + NaNO3(aq)
White ppt. of
silver chloride
Q.33. Give one example of an antacid.
Ans. Baking soda (sodium bicarbonate) (NaHCO3) is an antacid.
Q.34. Define oxidation on the basis of loss/gain of hydrogen/oxygen.
Ans. A chemical reaction which involves loss of hydrogen or gain of oxygen, is called an oxidation
reaction.
Q.35. Give an example of oxidation reaction.
Ans. S + O2  SO2
Sulphur has been oxidised to sulphur hydroxide.
Q.36. Which reactant is oxidised in the following chemical reaction ? [H.B.S.E. 2019 (Set-C)]
ZnO + C  Zn + CO
Ans. Carbon (C) is oxidized.
Q.37. What are redox reactions?
Ans. Chemical reactions involving oxidation and reduction simultaneously are called redox reactions.
Q.38. Give an example of a redox reaction.
Ans. 2Al + Fe2O3  Al2O3 + 2Fe
Chemical Reactions and Equations 19

Q.39. What happens when silver chloride is exposed to sunlight ? Write chemical equation.
Ans. 2AgCl (s) 2Ag (s) + Cl2 (g)
When silver chloride is exposed to sunlight, decomposition of silver chloride takes place.
Q.40. What type of reaction takes place between an acid and a base when they react to form salt
and water ?
Ans. It is a double displacement type of reaction.
NaOH + HCl  NaCl + H2O
Base Acid Salt Water
Q.41. What happens when dilute HCl is added to iron filings?
Ans. Iron reacts with dil. HCl and evolution of H2 gas takes place.
Fe + dil. 2HCl  FeCl2 + H2
Q.42. In the refining of silver, the recovery of silver from silver nitrate solution involves displacement
by copper metal. Write down the reaction involved.
Ans. 2AgNO3(aq) + Cu(s)  2Ag(s) + Cu(NO3)2(aq)
Pure silver
Q.43. What are oxidising agents?
Ans. The substances that get reduced, are called oxidising agents.
Q.44. What are reducing agents?
Ans. The substances that get oxidised, are called reducing agents.
Q.45. In the following reaction
CuO (s) + CO (g)  Cu (s) + CO2 (g)
name the substance reduced and the substance oxidised.
Ans. CuO has been reduced to Cu.
CO has been oxidised to CO2.
Q.46. Give the formula of quick lime and slaked lime.
Ans. Quick lime, calcium oxide : CaO
Slaked lime, calcium hydroxide : Ca (OH)2
Q.47. Why does the green colour of ferrous sulphate change when we heat it in a test tube ?
Ans. The green colour of ferrous sulphate (FeSO4 . 7H2O) is due to water of crystallization in it. When
we heat it, the water of crystallization is removed and its green colour fades away even if the decomposition
reaction has not taken place.
Q.48. Which compound of calcium is used in manufacture of cement?
Ans. Quick lime – calcium oxide (CaO) is used in manufacture of cement.
Q.49. Write the reaction in equation form that is used in black and white photography.
Ans. 2AgCl (s) 2Ag (s) + Cl2 (g)
Q.50. What is meant by corrosion?
Ans. The weakening of metals due to environmental effect is called corrosion. Metals react with O2,
pollutant gases in the presence of moisture and become weak.
Q.51. What is rancidity?
Ans. The process of change in smell, taste and quality of oily/fatty food due to oxidation is called
rancidity.
Q.52. What are antioxidants?
Ans. The substances which can prevent/slow oxidation of food are called antioxidants.
Q.53. What is meant by rusting?
Ans. The process of formation of a brown coloured powder over the surface of iron articles is called
rusting.
20 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.54. Give the formula of rust.

Ans. Chemically, rust is hydrated ferric oxide (Fe2O3 · xH2O).
Q.55. You have three solutions A, B and C whose pH value is 4, 7 and 10 respectively. Out of
above solutions, which solution is acidic ? § [H.B.S.E. 2019 (Set-A)]
Ans. The solution A is acidic whose pH value is 4.

II. Short-Answer Type Questions

Q.1. What is a chemical reaction? Give example.
Ans. Chemical reaction is a change in which new substances are formed.
Example : 3Fe(s) + 4H2O(g)  Fe3O4 (s) + 4H2(g)
Here, iron reacts with steam to form magnetic oxide of iron and hydrogen gas is formed.
Q.2. What are reactants and products?
Ans. Reactants : The substances which take part in chemical reactions are called reactants. Zinc and
H2SO4 are reactants.
Products : The substances which are formed as a result of a reaction, are called products. Here ZnSO4
and H2 are products.
Zn (s) + H2SO4 (dil.)  ZnSO4 (aq) + H2 (g)
Reactants Products
Q.3. How do we come to know that a reaction has taken place ?
Ans. By making the following observations, we come to know that a reaction has taken place :
(i) Change in state, (ii) Change in colour, (iii) Evolution of a gas, (iv) Change in temperature, etc.
Q.4. What is a chemical equation?
Ans. A chemical equation can be defined as representing a chemical reaction in the form of chemical
symbols and formulae of the reactants and products.
Example : Magnesium when burns in air/oxygen produces magnesium oxide.
Magnesium + Oxygen  Magnesium oxide
2Mg + O2  2MgO
Q.5. What are the essentials of a chemical equation?
Ans. Essentials of a chemical equation are :
(i) It must represent a true chemical change/reaction.
(ii) The reactants and products must be written in the form of their symbols and formulae.
(iii) The total number of atoms of each element must be same on both sides of the equation.
(iv) It must be balanced and informative.
Q.6. How do we write a chemical equation?
Ans. Various steps involved in writing a chemical equation are as follows :
(i) The reactants are always written on left hand side while the products are always written on right
hand side.
(ii) The formulae/symbols of various reactants are separated by + sign. The formulae of the products are
also separated by + sign.
(iii) An arrow () sign is put between the reactants and the products.
Example : Silver nitrate reacts with sodium chloride to give silver chloride and sodium nitrate.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 21

Silver nitrate + Sodium chloride  Silver chloride + Sodium nitrate

AgNO3 (aq) + NaCl (aq)  AgCl  + NaNO3 (aq)
Reactants Products
Q.7. What important information do we get from a chemical equation ?
Ans. A balanced chemical equation provides a lot of information :
(i) It tells the names of the reactants and the products.
(ii) It tells the relative number of molecules of reactants and products.
(iii) It tells us the relative number of moles of reactants and products.
(iv) It tells us the relative masses of reactants and products.
Q.8. State two limitations of a chemical equation.
Ans. Limitations of a chemical equation are :
(i) Chemical equation does not tell us the time required for completion of reaction. It does not tell us the
speed at which a reaction will take place.
(ii) It does not tell about the special conditions/risk factors involving a chemical change.
Q.9. Briefly describe ‘Hit and Trial’ method of balancing chemical equations.
Ans. The various steps of ‘Hit and Trial’ method of balancing chemical equations are :
Step – 1 : A compound with biggest formula is selected. By suitable multiplication, the number of
atoms are equalised on both sides of the equation.
Step – 2 : Then we choose the common elements with minimum number on both sides and equalise
their number.
Step – 3 : Elementary gases like oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, chlorine, etc. are first represented in
elemental form and then in the last they are balanced.
Q.10. What important information is conveyed by the following chemical equation?
Zn (s) + H2SO4 (aq)  ZnSO4 (aq) + H2 (g)
Ans. (i) When zinc reacts with sulphuric acid then zinc sulphate and hydrogen gas is formed.
(ii) One mole of zinc reacts with one mole of sulphuric acid to produce one mole of zinc sulphate and
one mole of hydrogen.
(iii) Here, zinc is present in solid form, sulphuric acid in liquid form (in water), zinc sulphate in liquid
form and hydrogen as a gas.
Q.11. What are combination reactions? Give example. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-B), 2019 (Set-C)]
Ans. Combination reactions : The chemical reactions in which two or more substances (elements/
compounds) combine to form single product, are called combination reactions.
Example : CaO(s) + H2O(l)  Ca(OH)2(aq)
Calcium oxide Water Calcium hydroxide
C + O2  CO2 + Heat
Carbon Oxygen Carbon dioxide
Q.12. What are exothermic reactions? Give example.
Ans. Exothermic reactions : The chemical reactions which are accompanied with evolution of heat
are called exothermic reactions. Combustion, respiration are examples of exothermic reactions.
Example : Burning of natural gas :
CH4(g) + 2O2(g)  CO2(g) + 2H2O(l) + Heat
Methane Oxygen Carbon dioxide
22 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.13. What are endothermic reactions? Give example.

Ans. Endothermic reactions : The chemical reactions which are accompanied with absorption of
(heat) energy, are called endothermic reactions.
Example : N2(g) + O2(g)  2NO – Heat
Nitrogen Oxygen Nitrogen monoxide
Q.14. What are decomposition reactions? Give example. [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-D)]
Ans. Decomposition reactions : The chemical reactions in which two or more products are formed
from the single reactant, are called decomposition reactions.
Example : 2FeSO4(s) Fe2O3(s) + SO2(g) + SO3(g)
Ferrous sulphate Ferric oxide Sulphur dioxide Sulphur trioxide
Q.15. What is meant by thermal decomposition ? Give example.
Ans. Thermal decomposition : The decomposition reaction which takes place due to heating is called
thermal decomposition.
Example : CaCO3 CaO + CO2
Calcium carbonate Calcium oxide Carbon dioxide
Q.16. What is meant by electrical decomposition reactions? Give example.
Ans. Electrical decomposition reactions (Electrolysis) : The decomposition reactions which take
place when electric current is passed through a substance in solution form or molten state, are called electrical
decomposition reactions.
Example : Electrolysis of water
2H2O(l ) 2H2(g) + O2(g)
Water Hydrogen Oxygen
Q.17. What are photolytic reactions? Give two examples.
Ans. Some compounds when exposed to light get decomposed to form two or more products by absorption
of light energy.
Examples :
(i) Black and white photography :
2AgBr  2Ag + Br2
Silver bromide Silver Bromine
(White) (Grey)
(ii) Photolysis of water in chloroplasts of plant cells :
2H2O  4H+ + 4e– + O2
Q.18. Name the type of reactions :
(i) 2NaHCO3  Na2CO3 + H2O + CO2
(ii) 2Al(OH)3  Al2O3 + 3H2O
(iii) Ca(OH)2 + CO2  CaCO3 + H2O
(iv) Fe + S  FeS
Ans. (i) Decomposition reaction, (ii) Decomposition reaction, (iii) Combination reaction,
(iv) Combination reaction.
Q.19. What are (single) displacement reactions? Give two examples. [H.B.S.E. 2019 (Set-A)]
Ans. Displacement reactions : The reactions in which more active elements displace less active elements
from their salt solutions.
Examples : (i) CuSO4(aq) + Fe(s)FeSO4(aq) + Cu(s)
(ii) FeSO4(aq) + Zn(s)ZnSO4(aq) + Fe(s)
Chemical Reactions and Equations 23

Q.20. What are double displacement reactions? Give two examples. [H.B.S.E. 2019 (Set-B)]
Ans. Double displacement reactions : The chemical reactions in which two compounds react by
exchange of ions and form new compounds, are called double displacement reactions.
These reactions generally occur in solutions and one of the products may be insoluble in the form of
precipitates.
Examples :
(i) Na2SO4(aq) + BaCl2(aq)  2NaCl(aq) + BaSO4(s)
Sodium sulphate Barium chloride Sodium chloride Barium sulphate
white ppt.
(ii) AgNO3(aq) + NaCl(aq)  AgCl(s) + NaNO3(aq)
Silver nitrate Sodium chloride Silver chloride Sodium nitrate
white ppt.
Q.21. What are precipitation reactions? Give example. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-D)]
Ans. The double displacement reactions in which one of the products formed is solid, in the form of
precipitates, are called precipitation reactions.
Example :
(i) AlCl3(aq) + 3NH4OH(aq)  Al(OH)3(s) + 3NH4Cl(aq)
Aluminium chloride Ammonium hydroxide Aluminium hydroxide Ammonium chloride
(ii) Na2SO4(aq) + BaCl2(aq)  BaSO4(s) + 2NaCl(aq)
Sodium sulphate Barium chloride Barium sulphate Sodium chloride
Q.22. What are neutralisation reactions ? Give example.
Ans. Neutralisation reactions : The reactions of acids and bases to form salt and water, are called
neutralisation reactions.
Example : NaOH(aq) + HCl(aq)  NaCl(aq) + H2O(l)
Sodium hydroxide Hydrochloric acid Sodium chloride Water
Q.23. What is oxidation? Give two examples.
Ans. Oxidation : It is defined as the process which involves addition of oxygen or any electronegative
element to a substance or removal of hydrogen.
Examples : (i) 2H2 + O2  2H2O
(ii) C + O2  CO2
(iii) 2FeCl2 + Cl2  2FeCl3
Q.24. What is reduction? Give two examples.
Ans. Reduction : The process of removal of oxygen or addition of hydrogen is called reduction.
Examples : (i) ZnO + CO  Zn + CO2
(ii) Cl2 + H2  2HCl
Q.25. Define the terms oxidising agent and reducing agent with examples.
Ans. Oxidising agent : It is defined as a substance which provides oxygen or any other electronegative
element/radical or removes hydrogen or any other electropositive element/radical.
Examples : Oxygen, chlorine, bromine, etc.
Reducing agent : It is defined as a substance which provides hydrogen or any other electropositive
element/radical or removes oxygen or any other electronegative element/radical.
Examples : Carbon, hydrogen, hydrogen sulphide, etc.
Q.26. What are redox reactions? Give two examples.
Ans. Redox reactions : The chemical reactions which involve both oxidation and reduction are called
redox reactions.
24 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Oxidation and reduction occur simultaneously and no oxidation can occur without a corresponding
reduction.
Examples :

(i) CuO + H2 Cu + H2O (ii) ZnO + C  Zn + CO

Q.27. Sodium acts as a reducing agent, while chlorine acts as an oxidising agent, why?
Ans. Any element which is electropositive and which can provide lose electrons can act as a reducing
agent.
Na Na+ + e–
2, 8, 1 2, 8
Sodium atom can provide electrons easily. So, it acts as an reducing agent as loss of electrons is called
oxidation.
Chlorine, on the other hand, is an electronegative element can accept electron easily, so it acts as an
oxidising agent.
Cl + e– Cl–
2, 8, 7 2, 8, 8
Gain of electrons is called reduction.
Q.28. When a green iron salt is heated strongly, its colour finally changes to brown/black and
odour of burning sulphur is given out.
(i) Name the iron salt.
(ii) Write chemical equation for the reaction.
(iii) Name the type of reaction.
Ans. (i) The iron salt is hydrated ferrous sulphate : FeSO4 · 7H2O.
(ii) 2FeSO4  Fe2O3(s) + SO2(g) + SO3(g)
Ferric oxide Sulphur dioxide Sulphur trioxide
(iii) It is a decomposition reaction.
Q.29. A colourless lead salt when heated, produces a yellow residue and brown fumes.
(i) Name the lead salt.
(ii) Write a chemical equation of the reaction involved.
(iii) Name the brown fumes.
Ans. (i) Lead nitrate [Pb (NO3)2]
(ii) 2Pb(NO3)2  2PbO + 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
Colourless Lead oxide Nitrogen dioxide Oxygen
Lead Nitrate
(iii) The brown fumes are that of NO2 (Nitrogen dioxide).
Q.30. What happens when a zinc strip is dipped into copper sulphate solution?
Ans. When a zinc strip is placed into copper sulphate solution following reaction takes place :
CuSO4 (aq) + Zn (s)  ZnSO4 (aq) + Cu (s)
Zinc being more reactive than copper displaces it from its salt solution. Single displacement reaction
takes place.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 25

Q.31. What happens when a piece of iron metal is placed in copper sulphate solution ? Name the
type of reaction involved.
Ans. The equation can be written as :
CuSO4 (aq) + Fe (s)  FeSO4 (aq) + Cu (s)
Iron being more reactive than copper, displaces it from its salt solution. This is a single displacement
type reaction.
Q.32. Write chemical equation with explanation of the statement– When a copper metal strip is
placed in a solution of silver nitrate, metallic silver is obtained.
Ans. The equation can be written as :
2AgNO3 (aq) + Cu (s)  Cu (NO3)2 (aq) + 2Ag (s)
(ppt.)
Copper is more reactive than silver, so it displaces silver from its salt solution.
Q.33. When copper powder is heated strongly in air it forms copper oxide. Write a balanced
chemical equation for this reaction. Name the substance oxidised and substance reduced.

Ans. 2Cu (s) + Air/O2  2CuO(s)

Copper powder Copper oxide

(i) Copper gets oxidised into copper oxide.

(ii) Oxygen gets reduced into copper oxide.
Q.34. What is meant by (metal) corrosion? Enlist factors which affect corrosion.
Ans. Corrosion may be defined as the weakening of metals due to environmental factors.
Factors affecting corrosion are :
(i) Nature of metal–reactive, less reactive, inert.
(ii) Air/oxygen and pollutant gases like sulphur oxides and nitrogen oxides.
(iii) Presence of moisture/humidity.
Q.35. What is rusting? How can we prevent rusting of iron articles?
Ans. The process of formation of brown powdery substance (rust) over the surface of iron articles, is
called rusting. The chemical formula of rust can be written as Fe2O3 · xH2O. Rusting takes place due to
reaction of iron with oxygen and water.
Prevention of rusting of iron :
(i) By painting iron articles.
(ii) By electroplating of copper, etc.
(iii) By galvanisation–layering of iron with zinc.
(iv) By preparing alloys like stainless steel, chrome steel or nickel steel.
Q.36. What is rancidity? How can we prevent it ?
Ans. The change in colour, smell and taste of food articles containing oils/fats due to their oxidation is
called rancidity.
It spoils the food and makes it unfit for consumption. The rancid food can cause food poisoning.
26 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Prevention of rancidity :
(i) By keeping the food in airtight containers.
(ii) By packaging chips etc., with inert gas like nitrogen (N2).
(iii) By adding antioxidants (the chemicals which slow down the rate of oxidation of food articles).
Q.37. What are antioxidants? Why are they added to packaged food articles ? Give two examples.
Ans. Antioxidants : Antioxidants are the substances (chemicals) which prevent oxidation. They are
added to packaged food so as to prevent its oxidation and spoilage of food.
Examples : (i) Butylated Hydroxy Anisole-BHA. (ii) Butylated Hydroxy Toluene - BHT

III. Essay Type Questions

Q.1. Write balanced chemical equations for the following :
(i) Aluminium sulphate solution reacts with barium chloride solution to form aluminium chloride
and barium sulphate.
(ii) Potassium chlorate on strong heating produces potassium chloride and oxygen.
(iii) Sodium metal dropped in water forming sodium hydroxide and hydrogen.
(iv) Aluminium sulphate solution reacts with a solution of sodium hydroxide to form white
precipitates of aluminium hydroxide and sodium sulphate solution.
(v) Calcium carbonate reacts with hydrochloric acid to produce calcium chloride, water and carbon
dioxide gas.
(vi) Sodium hydroxide solution reacts with hydrochloric acid solution to produce sodium chloride
solution and water.

Calcium carbonate + water
(vii) Calcium hydroxide + Carbon dioxide
(viii) Aluminium + Copper chloride  Aluminium chloride + Copper
(ix) Hydrogen sulphide gas burns in air to give water and sulphur dioxide.
(x) Carbon disulphide burns in air to give carbon dioxide and sulphur dioxide.
(xi) When solid mercury (II) oxide is heated.
(xii) When phosphorus is heated in air.

Ans. (i) Al2(SO4)3(aq) + 3BaCl2(aq)  2AlCl3(aq) + 3BaSO4

(ppt.)
(ii) 2KClO3(s) 2KCl(s) + 3O2(g)
(iii) 2Na(s) + 2H2O(l)  2NaOH(aq) + H2(g)
(iv) Al2 (SO4)3(aq) + 6NaOH(aq)  2Al(OH)3 + 3Na2SO4(aq)
White ppt.
(v) CaCO3 + 2HCl  CaCl2 + H2O + CO2
(vi) NaOH(aq) + HCl(aq)  NaCl (aq) + H2O
(vii) Ca(OH)2 + CO2  CaCO3 + H2O
(viii) 2Al + 3CuCl2  2AlCl3 + 3Cu
(ix) 2H2S + 3O2  2H2O + 2SO2 (Balanced)
(x) CS2 + 3O2  CO2 + 2SO2 (Balanced)
(xi) 2HgO (s) 2Hg (l) + O2 (g)
(xii) P4 (s) + 5 O2 (g)  2P2O5 (g)
Chemical Reactions and Equations 27

Q.2. How can we make a chemical equation more informative?

Ans. A chemical equation can be made more informative in the following ways :
(i) By indicating the physical states of the reactants and products
(s) for solids, (l) for liquids, (g) for gases, (aq) solution in water

Zn(s) + H2SO4(aq)  ZnSO4(aq) + H2(g)

(ii) If precipitates (solids) are formed then, we put ‘’ sign with the formula and if a gas is formed then
‘’ sign is put with the formula of the gas.
Zn(s) + H2SO4(aq)  ZnSO4(aq) + H2(g) 

NaCl(aq) + AgNO3(aq)  AgCl(s) + NaNO3(aq)

ppts.

(iii) The concentration of the reactants can be indicated by putting ‘dil’ for dilute and conc. for
concentrated, e.g.,
Zn(s) + dil. H2SO4(aq)  ZnSO4(aq) + H2(g)

(iv) By denoting the conditions under which a reaction is taking place, e.g.,
2KClO3 (s) 2KCl (s) + 3O2 (g)
Here, MnO2 acts as a catalyst and the reaction takes place on heating.
(v) Putting the signs for heat changes. Whether the reaction is endothermic or exothermic, e.g.,
(a) C (s) + O2 (g)  CO2 (g) + Heat
Reaction is exothermic, so + heat sign on product side.
(b) N2 (g) + O2 (g)  2NO (g) – Heat
Reaction is endothermic, so – heat sign on product side or + heat sign on reactant side.
Q.3. How to balance a skeletal chemical equation ?
Ans. A skeletal chemical equation needs to be balanced so that number of atoms of each element become
same on both sides of the equation. This will be in accordance with the law of conservation of mass. The
various steps for balancing a chemical equation are :
Step – 1 : Write the skeletal equation and draw boxes around each formula. Do not change anything
inside the box.
Fe + H2O  Fe3O4 + H2

Step – 2 : Find the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side and on the product side.
Element No. of atoms (LHS) No. of atoms (RHS)
Fe 1 3
H 2 2
O 1 4
Step – 3 : Equalise the number of atoms on both sides. Do not change the formula of a compound. It is
generally convenient first to equalise the number of atoms of element with maximum number of atoms. Here,
it is oxygen.
28 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Fe + 4 H2O  Fe3O4 + H2

Fe + 4 H2O  Fe3O4 + 4 H2

3 Fe + 4 H2O  Fe3O4 + 4 H2

So, the balanced equation is :

3Fe + 4H2O  Fe3O4 + 4H2
Element No. of atoms (LHS) No. of atoms (RHS)
Fe 3 3
H 8 8
O 4 4
Step – 4 : Write the physical states of reactants and products.
3Fe(s) + 4H2O(g)  Fe3O4(s) + 4H2(g)
Steam
Step – 5 : Mention special conditions/requirement under which a reaction will take place, e.g.,
CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(l)

6CO2 + 6H2O(l ) C6H12O6(aq) + 6O2(g)

Glucose

Q.4. Write balanced chemical equations for the following reactions :

(i) Iron metal dissolves in copper sulphate solution with the formation of iron sulphate and copper.
(ii) Magnesium when heated in an atmosphere of nitrogen, catches fire and forms magnesium
nitride.
(iii) Zinc metal reacts with aqueous hydrochloric acid to produce a solution of zinc chloride and
hydrogen gas.
(iv) Hydrogen sulphide reacts with sulphur dioxide to produce sulphur and water.
(v) Iron reacts with steam to form iron (III) oxide and hydrogen gas.
Ans. (i) Fe(s) + CuSO4(aq)  FeSO4(aq) + Cu(s)
(ii) 3Mg(s) + N2(g) Mg3N2(s)
(iii) Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq)  ZnCl2(aq) + H2(g)
(iv) 2H2S(g) + SO2(g)  3S(s) + 2H2O(l)
(v) 3Fe(s) + 4H2O(g)  Fe3O4(s) + 4H2(g)
Q.5. Balance the following equations :
(i) Ba(OH)2(aq) + HBr(aq)  BaBr2(aq) + H2O(l)
(ii) KCN(aq) + H2SO4(aq)  K2SO4(aq) + HCN(g)
(iii) CH4(g) + O2(g)  CO2(g) + H2O(g)
(iv) CS2(l) + O2(g)  CO2(g) + SO2(g)
(v) NH3(g) + CuO(s)  Cu(s) + N2(g) + H2O(l)
Chemical Reactions and Equations 29

Ans. (i) Ba (OH)2(aq) + 2HBr(aq)  BaBr2(aq) + 2H2O(l)

(ii) 2KCN(aq) + H2SO4(aq)  K2SO4(aq) + 2HCN(g)
(iii) CH4(g) + 2O2(g)  CO2 + 2H2O + Heat
(iv) CS2(l) + 3O2(g)  CO2(g) + 2SO2(g)
(v) 2NH3(g) + 3CuO(s)  3Cu(s) + N2(g) + 3H2O(l)
Q.6. What are five different types of chemical reactions ? Explain them by giving one example of
each type.
Ans. Chemical reactions are of following types :
(a) Combination reactions (b) Decomposition reactions
(c) Single displacement reactions (d) Double displacement reactions
(e) Redox reactions
(a) Combination reactions : The chemical reactions in which two or more substances combine to form
a single product, are called combination reactions.
Example : Calcium oxide reacts vigorously with water to produce slaked lime.
CaO(s) + H2O(l)  Ca(OH)2(aq)
Calcium oxide Calcium hydroxide
(b) Decomposition reactions : The chemical reactions in which single reactant decomposes to produce
two or more products.
Example : Limestone (Calcium carbonate) on heating yields calcium oxide and carbon dioxide.
CaCO3(s) CaO(s) + CO2(g)
Calcium carbonate Calcium oxide Carbon dioxide

(c) Single displacement reactions : The chemical reactions in which more reactive elements replace
less reactive elements from their salt solution.
CuSO4 (aq) + Fe (s)  Cu (s) + FeSO4 (aq)
Iron is more reactive than copper.
(d) Double displacement reactions : The reactions in which two compounds react by an exchange of
ions to form new compounds, are called double displacement reactions.
Example :
Na2SO4(aq) + BaCl2(aq)  BaSO4(s) + 2NaCl(aq)
Sodium sulphate Barium chloride Barium sulphate Sodium chloride

(e) Redox reactions : The chemical reactions in which oxidation and reduction occur simultaneously,
are called redox reactions. Oxidation
Example :



ZnO + C  Zn + CO
Zinc oxide Coke Zinc Carbon monoxide



Reduction
Zinc oxide has been reduced to zinc and carbon has been oxidised to carbon monoxide.
Q.7. Write the type of the following chemical reactions. Also write chemical equations.
(i) A magnesium wire is burnt in air. (ii) Limestone is heated. (iii) Silver bromide is exposed to sunlight.
30 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

(iv) Electricity is passed through water.

(v) Ammonia and hydrogen chloride are mixed.
Ans. (i) 2Mg (s) + O2 (g)  2MgO
Magnesium Oxygen Magnesium oxide
It is combination reaction.
(ii) CaCO3 CaO + CO2
Limestone Calcium oxide Carbon dioxide
It is a decomposition reaction.
(iii) 2AgBr(s)  2Ag + Br2(g)
Silver bromide Silver Bromine
It is a decomposition reaction.
(iv) 2H2O(l) 2H2(g) + O2(g)
Water Hydrogen Oxygen

It is a decomposition reaction.
(v) NH3(g) + HCl(g)  NH4Cl(s)
Ammonia Hydrochloric acid Ammonium chloride
It is combination reaction.

IMPORTANT EXPERIMENTAL QUESTIONS/ACTIVITIES

Experiment 1. What happens when magnesium

ribbon is burnt in air ? Show how can it be performed ?
Procedure : (i) A magnesium ribbon of about 5 cm long
is taken. It is cleaned with sand paper so as to remove layer of
magnesium oxide from it. Burning
magnesium
(ii) By holding it with a pair of tongs, it is burnt with the ribbon
help of spirit lamp or burner. Watch glass
Magnesium oxide
Observation : The white powder is formed which is
collected in a watch glass.
Result : When magnesium ribbon is burnt in air, then Fig. 1.2 : Burning of a magnesium ribbon in air and
white powder of magnesium oxide is formed. collection of magnesium oxide in a watch glass

2Mg(s) + O2(g)  2MgO(s)

Magnesium Oxygen Magnesium oxide

Precautions : (i) As magnesium burns with a white flash, it is better to use eye protection.
(ii) Keep the magnesium ribbon as far as possible from your eyes.

Experiment 2. What happens when lead nitrate solution reacts with potassium iodide solution ?
How will you perform this experiment ?
Procedure : Take lead nitrate solution in a test tube. Add potassium iodide solution to it.
Observation : Formation of yellow coloured precipitates of lead iodide is observed.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 31

Potassium
iodide

Lead nitrate Yellow ppt.

of Pbl2

Fig. 1.3

Result : When lead nitrate solution reacts with potassium iodide solution, then lead iodide and potassium
nitrate are formed. Lead iodide appears as precipitates of yellow colour.
Pb(NO3)2(aq) + 2KI(aq)  PbI2(s) + 2KNO3 (aq)
Lead nitrate Potassium iodide Lead iodide (Yellow ppt.) Potassium nitrate

Experiment 3. What happens when we add hydrochloric acid or sulphuric acid to zinc granules?
To show reaction of zinc with dilute hydrochloric acid.
Procedure : Take a few granules of zinc into a conical flask. Then, slowly add dilute hydrochloric acid
to it. Fit a tube through a rubber cork as shown in
the figure 1.4.
Observation : Evolution of a gas takes Beaker
place.
Testing : Take a burning matchstick near
the tube. The gas starts burning quickly. Water

Result : Reaction of a metal (Zn) with dil. Calcium

acids produces hydrogen gas. oxide

Zn (s) + dil. 2HCl (aq)  ZnCl2 (aq) Fig.1.4 : Formation of slaked lime by the
+ H2 (g) reacion of calcium oxide with water

Precautions : (i) Use only dilute acids.

(ii) Handle the acid with care. (iii) Hydrogen is an explosive gas so, take care while lighting.
(iv) Use small quantity of gas in a test tube.

Experiment 4. Give an activity/experiment to show combination reaction.

Combination reactions are those in which two or more substances combine to form single product.
Procedure : (i) Take small amount of calcium oxide (quick lime) in a beaker. (ii) Slowly add water to it.
(iii) Observe the beaker and feel it for any temperature change.
32 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Observation : The moment we add water to

calcium oxide reaction takes place vigorously. White
Beaker
paste is formed and the temperature rises.
Result : When calcium oxide reacts with water,
then calcium hydroxide is formed and the reaction is Water
exothermic, it is accompanied with release of heat.
Calcium
CaO (s) + H2O (l)  Ca (OH)2 + Heat oxide
In this reaction calcium oxide combines with water
Fig.1.5 : Formation of slaked lime by the
to form a single product. reacion of calcium oxide with water

Experiment 5. Give an activity to show

decomposition reaction.
Decomposition reactions are those in which
Pusinggas
Pushing gasgently
gently
single reactant produces two or more products. towardsnose
towards nose
Procedure : (i) Take about 2 g ferrous sulphate Do not point the
crystals in a dry boiling test tube. (ii) Note the colour mouth of boiling test
tube at your
of ferrous sulphate. (iii) Heat the boiling test tube neighbours
or yourself
over the flame of a burner/spirit lamp.
Dry boiling
Observation : (i) Initially the colour of ferrous test tube
sulphate crystals was green, then it changed into A pair of tongs Ferrous
sulphate
brown. (ii) Gases are produced which feel like crystals
burning sulphur when smelt.
Burner
Result : Ferrous sulphate crystals (FeSO4·
Fig.1.6 : Correct way of heating the test tube containing
7H2O) first lose water and their colour change. Then crystals of ferrous sulphate and of smelling the odour
it get decomposed into ferric oxide, sulphur dioxide
and sulphur trioxide. The reaction may be written as :
2FeSO4 (s) Fe2O3 (s) + SO2 (g) + SO3 (g)
Experiment 6. What happens when lead nitrate
powder is heated in a boiling tube ? How will you perform
this activity ?
Procedure : (i) Take about 2.0g lead nitrate powder
in a boiling tube. (ii) Hold the boiling tube with a pair of Tongs
tongs and heat it over a flame. (iii) Observe the changes.
Boiling test tube
Observation : Emission of brown fumes is observed.
These fumes are that of nitrogen dioxide. Lead nitrate

Result : Decomposition of lead nitrate to formation of Burner

lead oxide, nitrogen dioxide and oxygen gas.
2Pb(NO3)2(s) 2PbO(s) + 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
Lead nitrate Lead oxide Nitrogen oxide Oxygen
Fig.1.7 : Heating of lead nitrate and
emission of nitrogen dioxide
Chemical Reactions and Equations 33

Experiment 7. How is electrolysis of water performed?

Describe the activity with the help of a diagram. Oxygen Plastic mug
Hydrogen
Electrolysis : The process involves decomposition of a Water
substance in liquid form or molten state with the help of electric Graphite Water
current. rod
Rubber stopper
Anode Cathode
Procedure : (i) Take a voltameter and fill it with water
such that electrodes are immersed. (ii) Add a few drops of
sulphuric acid in the water. (iii) Take two graduated test tubes
Switch
filled with water and invert them over the two electrodes. Battery

(iv) Switch on the current. Fig.1.8 : Electrolysis of water

Observation : (i) Bubbles of gas formation is observed

at both the electrodes. (ii) These bubbles displace water in the graduated tubes. (iii) The volume of gas
collected in one of the tubes is double the other.

Then, test the gases for combustion.

Result : When electric current is passed through acidified water, then it decomposes to form hydrogen
and oxygen gas.

The reaction can be written as : 2H2O (l) Electric current 2H2 (g) + O2 (g)

Experiment 8. Give an activity to show photo-decomposition (photolysis) of silver chloride.

Photolysis means decomposition (break up) of a

substance into two or more products by absorption of energy.

Procedure : (i) Take about 2 g silver chloride in a

china dish. (ii) Note its colour–white. (iii) Place this china Silver
chloride
dish under sunlight for some time. (iv) Observe the colour China dish

of the silver chloride after some time.

Observation : The white silver chloride turns grey in

sunlight.

Result : Due to decomposition of silver chloride into Fig.1.9 : Silver chloride turns grey
silver and chlorine, the white silver chloride turns grey in in sunlight to form silver metal

sunlight.

2AgCl (s) 2Ag (s) + Cl2 (g)

Experiment 9. Give an activity to show displacement reaction.

Displacement reaction : The chemical reactions in which more reactive elements displace less reactive
elements from their salt solution.
34 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Procedure : (i) Take three iron nails and clean them by

Stand
rubbing with sand paper.
(ii) Take two test tubes marked A and B. In each test tube
take about 10 ml copper sulphate solution.
(iii) Immerse two iron nails in test tube B for about Test tube
20 minutes. (iv) Keep one iron nail aside for comparison. Thread
(v) After 20 minutes take out two iron nails from test
tube B. Copper sulphate
solution
(vi) Compare the colour in two test tubes and that of iron
nails.
Iron nail
Observation :
(i) The two iron nails become brownish in colour.
(ii) The blue colour of copper sulphate solution in test
tube B fades away.
Result : Iron being more reactive than copper displaces
it from copper sulphate solution. (a)

Fig. 1.10 : (a) Iron nails dipped in copper

sulphate solution

Test tube

Iron nail
taken out Test tube
Iron from stand
nail copper Copper
sulphate sulphate
solution Reaction
solution mixture (test
(test tube
A) tube B)

(b)
Fig. 1.10 : (b) Iron nails and copper sulphate solutions compared before and after the experiment

CuSO4 (aq) + Fe (s)  FeSO4 (aq) + Cu (s)

Experiment 10. Give an activity to show double displacement
reaction.
Double displacement reaction : When two compounds in
solution form, exchange their ions, then the chemical reaction is called
double displacement reaction. Test tube containing
solution of sodium
Procedure : (i) Take about 3 ml of sodium sulphate solution in sulphate
a test tube. (ii) In another test tube, take about 3 ml of barium chloride
solution. (iii) Mix the two solutions and observe the changes. —
Testtube
Test tubecontaining
containing
Observations : (i) A white substance insoluble in water is formed solutionofofbarium
barium
solution
which is called precipitate. (ii) It is a precipitation reaction. chloride
chloride
Result : When sodium sulphate reacts with barium chloride,
Fig. 1.11 : Formation of barium
then barium sulphate and sodium chloride is formed. sulphate and sodium chloride
Na2SO4(aq) + BaCl2(aq)  BaSO4 + 2NaCl(aq)
Sodium sulphate Barium chloride Barium sulphate Sodium chloride
It is a double displacement reaction.
Chemical Reactions and Equations 35

Experiment 11. Give an activity to show oxidation of copper.

Oxidation : It means addition of oxygen or removal
of hydrogen from a substance.
Procedure : (i) Take about 1g of copper powder in
a china dish. (ii) Heat the china dish over spirit lamp or
burner.
Observation : The surface of the copper powder
becomes black in colour.
Result : Copper on heating reacts with oxygen
present in air and forms black coloured copper oxide.
The reaction can be written as :
Cu (s) + O2 (g) 2CuO (s)
Here, copper gets oxidised to copper oxide.


36 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

2 ACIDS, BASES AND SALTS

ALTS

SCIENTIFIC TERMS
1. Acids : Those substances which give H + ions in aqueous solution, are called acids. They are sour
in taste and turn blue litmus red.
2. Bases : Those substances which give OH – ions in aqueous solution, are called bases. They are
bitter in taste and turn red litmus blue.
3. Salts : When an acid reacts with a base or a metal, then, the compounds formed are called salts.
4. Neutralisation : When an acid reacts with a base to form salt and water, then the reaction is
called neutralisation, as the acidic/basic property is neutralised.
5. Alkalies : Those bases which are soluble in water are called alkalies.
6. Indicators : Those substances which change their colour in acidic or basic media are called
(acid-base) indicators.
7. Universal indicator : It is a mixture of several indicators, e.g., pH indicators.
8. pH scale : A scale for measuring hydrogen ion concentration in a solution, is called pH scale.
9. pH : It is negative logarithm of H + ion/H3O+ ion concentration to the base 10.
10. pH paper : A filter paper soaked in universal indicator.
11. Neutral solutions : Those solutions which are neither acidic nor basic in character are called
neutral solutions.
12. Antacids : Those substances which are used to neutralise acids are called antacids.
13. Brine : A highly concentrated solution of sodium chloride.
14. Water of crystallization : The chemically bound water molecules to a salt which provide/impart
a characteristic colour to the salt crystals.
15. Litmus solution : It is a purple coloured extract from lichens (which are symbiotic- An alga and
a fungus) which is used as acid-base indicator.
16. Synthetic indicators : The acid-base indicators which can be synthesized in lab, e.g.,
phenolphthalein, methyl orange, etc.
17. Mineral acids : Those acids which can be obtained from minerals like chlorides, sulphates,
nitrates, etc. are called mineral acids.
18. Organic acids : The acids naturally available in plants and animals are called organic acids, e.g.,
lemon juice contains citric acid.
19. Ionisation : The process of formation of ions in aqueous solution is called ionisation.
20. Hydronium ions (H3O+) : In aqueous solution H+ ions occur as hydronium ions.
21. pH meter : An instrument used for measuring pH of a solution.

cont...
36
Acids, Bases and Salts 37

22. Strong acids : The acids which ionise completely in aqueous solution, are called strong acids,
e.g.,mineral acids.
23. Weak acids : The acids which do not ionise completely but dissociate poorly are called weak
acids, e.g., organic acids.
24. Common salt : Sodium chloride : NaCl
25. Washing soda : Sodium carbonate : Na2CO3 · 10 H2O
26. Baking soda : Sodium hydrogencarbonate : NaHCO3
27. Bleaching powder : Calcium oxychloride : CaOCl2
28. Plaster of Paris : Calcium sulphate hemihydrate : CaSO4 · ½ H2O

CHAPTER AT A GLANCE
1. Acids are sour in taste and change the colour of blue litmus to red, whereas bases taste bitter and
change the colour of red litmus to blue.
2. Litmus is a natural indicator obtained from lichens.
3. Methyl orange and phenolphthalein are synthetic indicators.
4. HCl, HNO3 and H2SO4 are strong mineral acids whereas KOH and NaOH are strong bases.
5. Large number of metals react with acids to produce salt and H2 gas.
6. A few reactive metals like zinc react with strong bases like NaOH to yield H2 gas.
7. Metal carbonates or bicarbonates react with acids to produce CO2 gas.
8. Acids and bases react with each other to form salts and water, the process is called neutralisation.
9. Metal oxides which are basic in nature react with acids to form salts and water.
10. The non-metal oxides like CO2, which is acidic, react with bases to form salts and water.
11. The acids ionise in water and conduct electricity.
12. The acids when added to water (dropwise) ionise to produce H+ ions which combine with water
(H2O) molecules to produce hydronium (H3O+) ions.
13. The bases when dissolved in water ionise to yield OH– ions.
14. We should not add water to a strong acid but should add acid dropwise to water for dilution.
15. Mixing of acid/base in water results in decrease of H3O+/OH– ions per unit volume. Such a process
is called dilution.
16. The pH of a solution (acid or base) is an indication of the strength of an acid or a base.
17. The pH of a neutral solution is 7. The pH less than 7 means acidic and more than 7 means basic.
18. The strength of acids and bases depends on the number of H+ ions and OH– ions produced.
19. Proper pH is necessary for survival of organisms in water and soil.
20. The nature of salts can also be acidic or basic. The salts of strong acids and weak base are acidic and
salts of strong base and weak acids are basic in nature.

cont...
38 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

21. Common salt is very important compound. It is a neutral salt and is used as raw material for synthesis
of large number of chemical compounds.
22. NaOH is manufactured from common salt by chlor-alkali process.
23. Washing soda and baking soda are manufactured by Solvay process from sodium chloride.
24. Generally, the colour of large number of salts is due to presence of water of crystallisation.
25. Plaster of Paris is obtained by heating of gypsum (CaSO4·2H2O) and is chemically calcium sulphate
hemihydrate.

TEXTUAL QUESTIONS

Question on Introduction (PAGE–18)

Q.1. You have been provided with three test tubes. One of them contains distilled water and the
other two contain an acidic solution and a basic solution, respectively. If you are given only red litmus
paper, how will you identify the contents of each test tube ?
Ans. From three test tubes take little solution in another three test tubes. Pour red litmus paper in each
test tube whose red litmus changes in blue that is Basic solution. There is no affect of destilled water or acidic
solution on red litmus. Now red litmus which changed in blue pour it in another two test tubes. There is no
affect of distilled water on blue litmus, whereas the rest is acidic solution because it again changes the blue
litmus in red.
Questions on Article 2.1 (PAGE–22)
Q.1. Why should curd and sour substances not be kept in brass and copper vessels ?
Ans. Curd and sour substances contain (organic) acids. These acids react with metals like copper, zinc
( Brass : Cu + Zn) forming their compounds. These compounds specially that of copper metal are poisonous.
These get mixed with eatables and make the food article unfit for consumption. [H.B.S.E. 2018 (Set-D)]
Therefore, sour substances should not be kept in brass or copper vessels.
Q.2. Which gas is usually liberated when an acid reacts with a metal ? Illustrate with an example.
How will you test for the presence of this gas ?
Ans. When an acid reacts with a metal, hydrogen gas is liberated.
Zn (s) + 2HCl (aq)  ZnCl2 (aq) + H2 (g)
Testing : The presence of H2 gas is tested by taking a burning matchstick near the gas. The gas is
combustible. It burns with a pop sound.
Q.3. Metal compound ‘A’ reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to produce effervescence. The gas
evolved extinguishes a burning candle. Write a balanced chemical equation for the reaction if one of
the compounds formed is calcium chloride.
Ans. The metal compound ‘A’ is either calcium carbonate CaCO3 or calcium hydrogen carbonate Ca
(HCO3)2. On reacting with hydrochloric acid it produces carbon dioxide gas which is known to extinguish
fire.
CaCO3 + 2HCl  CaCl2 + CO2 + H2O
Acids, Bases and Salts 39

Questions on Article 2.2 (PAGE–25)

Q.1. Why do HCl, HNO3, etc. show acidic characters in aqueous solutions while solutions of
compounds like alcohol and glucose do not show acidic character ?
Ans. HCl and HNO3 are mineral acids. When dissolved in water, they ionise to produce H+ ions or
H3O+ ions. They show acidic character due to presence of these ions in their aqueous solutions.
HCl (aq) H3O+ (aq) + Cl– (aq)
HNO3 (aq) H3O+ (aq) + NO3– (aq)
but Alcohol and glucose are organic covalent compounds. When dissolved in water, they fail to give H+
ions, so they do not show acidic character.
Q.2. Why does an aqueous solution of an acid conduct electricity ?
Ans. In aqueous solution an acid ionises to produce ions.
H2SO4 (aq) 2H3O+ (aq) + SO4– – (aq)
or H2SO4 (aq) 2H+ (aq) + SO4– – (aq)
Presence of these ions cations as well as anions make their aqueous solution conductor of electricity.
Q.3. Why does dry HCl gas not change the colour of the dry litmus paper ?
Ans. Dry HCl (g) do not change the colour of the dry litmus paper, because for ionisation/dissociation
presence of water is must. Under dry conditions, it will not produce H+ ions and will not act as an acid.
Q.4. While diluting an acid, why is it recommended that the acid should be added to water and
not water to the acid ? [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-B)]
Ans. The process of dissolving an acid in water is a highly exothermic reaction.
For dilution when we add acid dropwise to water in a beaker, then the amount of heat produced will be
less. But if we add water to an acid in a beaker, then the quantity of heat produced will be very large. It can
cause the mixture to splash out and cause burns. The glass container may also break leading to accident.
Q.5. How is the concentration of hydronium ions (H3O + ) affected when a solution of an acid is
diluted ?
Ans. When we add water to a solution of an acid, this results in decrease in concentration of H +/H3O+
ions per unit volume. The process is called dilution and the acid as dilute acid.
Q.6. How is the concentration of hydroxide ions (OH – ) affected when excess base is dissolved in
a solution of sodium hydroxide ?
Ans. When we add excess base to a solution of sodium hydroxide, it will result in concentration of
OH – ions per unit volume and the solution will become more concentrated.
Questions on Article 2.3 (PAGE–28)
Q.1. You have two solutions, A and B. The pH of solution A is 6 and pH of solution B is 8. Which
solution has more hydrogen ion concentration ? Which of this is acidic and which one is basic ?
Ans. The solution A with pH 6 is acidic as its pH is less than 7.
The solution B with pH 8 (more than 7) is a base.
Solution A being acidic have more number of H+ ions (100 times more than solution B).
Q.2. What effect does the concentration of H+ (aq) ions have on the nature of the solution ?
Ans. Presence of H+ ions make the solution acidic. If the concentration of H+ (aq) ions in a solution
increases, it makes the solution strong acid.
If the concentration of H+ ions decreases, it makes the acid dilute.
40 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.3. Do basic solutions also have H+ (aq) ions ? If yes, then why are these basic ?
Ans. Yes, basic solutions also have H+ (aq) ions but they are still basic, because they have more
concentration of OH– (aq) ions as compared to H+ (aq) ions.
A solution becomes neutral if the number of H+ (aq) and OH– (aq) ions is equal.
Q.4. Under what soil condition do you think a farmer would treat the soil of his fields with quick
lime (calcium oxide) or slaked lime (calcium hydroxide) or chalk (calcium carbonate) ?
Ans. All the salts mentioned in the question, i.e., calcium oxide (quick lime), CaO, (Calcium Hydroxide)
Ca(OH)2 (slaked lime) and calcium carbonate (chalk) are basic in nature.
The need of these salts is felt only when the soil has become acidic in nature.

Questions on Article 2.4 (PAGE–33)

Q.1. What is the common name of the compound CaOCl2 ?
Ans. Bleaching powder is the common name of calcium oxychloride : CaOCl2.
Q.2. Name the substance which on treatment with chlorine yields bleaching powder.
Ans. Calcium hydroxide : Ca(OH)2 (slaked lime).
Q.3. Name the sodium compound which is used for softening hard water.
Ans. Sodium carbonate Na2CO3 · 10 H2O (washing soda).
Q.4. What will happen if a solution of sodium hydrocarbonate is heated ? Give the equation of the
reaction involved.
Ans. When a solution of sodium hydrocarbonate is heated, it decomposes to produce sodium carbonate,
water and carbon dioxide.
2NaHCO3 (aq) Na2CO3 (s) + H2O (l) + CO2 (g)
Q.5. Write an equation to show the reaction between plaster of Paris and water.
Ans. CaSO4· H2O+ 1 H2O  CaSO4·2H2O
Plaster of paris Water Gypsum

OR
2CaSO4·H2O+ 3H2O  2CaSO4·4H2O

TEXTUAL EXERCISES
Q.1. A solution turns red litmus blue, its pH is likely to be
(a) 1 (b) 4 (c) 5 (d) 10
Ans. (d) 10
Q.2. A solution reacts with crushed egg-shells to give a gas that turns lime-water milky. The solution
contains :
(a) NaCl (b) HCl (c) LiCl (d) KCl
Ans. (b) HCl
Acids, Bases and Salts 41

Q.3. 10 mL of a solution of NaOH is found to be completely neutralised by 8 mL of a given

solution of HCl. If we take 20 mL of the same solution of NaOH, the amount HCl solution (the same
solution as before) required to neutralise it will be :
(a) 4 mL (b) 8 mL (c) 12 mL (d) 16 mL
Ans. (d) 16 mL
Q.4. Which one of the following types of medicines is used for treating indigestion ? [2018 (Set-A)]
(a) Antibiotic (b) Analgesic (c) Antacid (d) Antiseptic
Ans. (c) Antacid
Q.5. Write word equations and then balanced equations for the reaction taking place when :
(a) dilute sulphuric acid reacts with zinc granules.
(b) dilute hydrochloric acid reacts with magnesium ribbon.
(c) dilute sulphuric acid reacts with aluminium powder.
(d) dilute hydrochloric acid reacts with iron filings.
Ans. (a) Zinc + dil. Sulphuric acid  Zinc sulphate + Hydrogen
Zn (s) + dil. H2SO4 (aq)  ZnSO4 (aq) + H2
(b) Magnesium + dil. Hydrochloric acid  Magnesium chloride + Hydrogen
Mg (s) + dil. 2HCl (aq)  MgCl2 (aq) + H2 (g)
(c) Aluminium + dil. Sulphuric acid  Aluminium sulphate + Hydrogen
2Al + dil. 3H2SO4 (aq)  Al2 (SO4)3 (aq) + 3H2 (g)
(d) Iron + dil. Hydrochloric acid  Iron chloride + Hydrogen
Fe (s) + dil. 2HCl (aq)  FeCl2 (aq) + H2 (g)
Q.6. Compounds such as alcohols and glucose also contain hydrogen but are not categorised as
acids. Describe an activity to prove it.
Ans. Alcohol and glucose when dissolved in
water do not release H+/H3O+ ions. So, they are not
categorised as acids.
Activity : (i) Take solutions of glucose and
alcohol in separate beakers.
(ii) Fix two nails on a cork and place the cork in
a 100 ml beaker.
(iii) Connect the nails to the two terminals of a 6
volt battery through a bulb and a switch as shown in
figure.
(iv) Then pour some glucose solution into the
beaker and switch on the current.
Observation : The bulb does not glow which
indicates that glucose solution do not conduct electricity.
Result : It clearly means that glucose do not ionise
to release H+ ions. So, it cannot act as an acid.
Note : When the same activity is repeated with alcohol solution, same result is obtained.
42 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.7. Why does distilled water not conduct electricity, whereas rain water does ? [2018 (Set-A)]
Ans. Distilled water does not conduct electricity because it is a covalent compound and does not ionise.
Absence of ions make distilled water a bad conductor of electricity.
Rain water contains so many acidic gases as impurities. Solution of these gases can cause ionisation of
water. So rain water can conduct electricity because of its acidic nature.
Q.8. Why do acids not show acidic behaviour in the absence of water ?
Ans. Acids ionise in aqueous medium only. In water, they produce H+/H3O+ ions. It is because of these
ions that they behave as acids.
In absence of water, they fail to dissociate and H+ (aq)/H3O+ (aq) ions are not produced. So, they do not
show their acidic behaviour.
Q.9. Five solutions A, B, C, D and E when tested with universal indicator showed pH as 4, 1, 11, 7
and 9 respectively. Which solution is :
(a) neutral ? (b) strongly alkaline ? (c) strongly acidic ?
(d) weakly acidic ? (e) weakly alkaline ?
Arrange the pH in increasing order of hydrogen-ion concentration.
Ans. Solution A B C D E
pH 4 1 11 7 9
(a) Solution D is neutral with pH 7. (b) Solution C is strongly alkaline with pH 11.
(c) Solution B is strongly acidic with pH 1. (d) Solution A is weakly acidic with pH 4.
(e) Solution E is weakly alkaline with pH 9.
Increasing order of hydrogen ion concentration : C < E < D < A < B
Q.10. Equal lengths of magnesium ribbons are taken in test tubes A and B. Hydrochloric acid (HCl)
is added to test tube A, while acetic acid (CH3COOH) is added to test tube B. Amount and concetration
taken for both the acids are same. In which test tube will the fizzing occur more vigorously and why ?
Ans. In test tube A to which HCl (aq) has been added, fizzing (due to production of H2) will occur more
vigorously because HCl is a strong acid and ionises to much greater extent as compared to CH3COOH (acetic
acid) which is a weak acid and ionises to lesser extent.
Q.11. Fresh milk has a pH of 6. How do you think the pH will change as it turns into curd ?
Explain your answer.
Ans. Fresh milk has a pH of 6. When it changes into curd, lactic acid is produced due to action of
Lactobacillus bacteria. Lactic acid although a weak acid, will increase H+ ion concentration in the curd. It
will decrease the pH of curd.
So, due to increase in H+ ion concentration acidity will increase.
Q.12. A milkman adds a very small amount of baking soda to fresh milk.
(a) Why does he shift the pH of the fresh milk from 6 to slightly alkaline ?
(b) Why does this milk take a long time to set as curd ?
Ans. (a) Because the enzymes present in the milk, can spoil the food at pH 6 because it is optimum for
their activity. Under alkaline conditions (pH more than 7), these enzymes will not be able to carry out
decomposition reactions, so milk will not be spoilt.
Acids, Bases and Salts 43

(b) This milk will take sometime to set as curd because initially the lactic acid produced by the
Lactobacillus, will be neutralised by the basic salt. So, neutralisation reaction takes sometime, thereafter,
milk will be converted into curd.
Q.13. Plaster of Paris should be stored in a moisture-proof container. Explain why ?
Ans. Plaster of Paris possesses cement-like property. It can get hardened by reacting with moisture/
water. In other words, we can say that it will set and get spoilt, so it should be stored in a moisture-free
container.
Q.14. What is neutralisation reaction ? Give two examples. [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-C)]
Ans. Reaction of an acid with a base to form salt and water is called neutralisation. This reaction
neutralises the acidic and basic behaviour of acids and bases respectively.
Examples : NaOH(aq) + HCl(aq)  NaCl(aq) + H2O(l )
2KOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq)  K2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(l )
Q.15. Give two important uses of washing soda and baking soda.
Ans. Uses of washing soda : (i) It is used in glass, soap and paper industries. (ii) It is used as a
constituent of washing powder.
Uses of baking soda : (i) It is used as ingredient of baking powder used in bakeries. (ii) It is also used
as ingredient of antacids.

EXAMINATION BASED OTHER IMPORTANT QUESTIONS

I. Very Short-Answer Type Questions

A. Multiple Choice Questions
1. Tartaric acid is found in : [H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-D)]
(A) Vinegar (B) Tomato
(C) Tamarind (D) Nettle’s sting
Ans. (C) Tamarind
2. Tomato contains :
(A) tartaric acid (B) oxalic acid
(C) formic acid (D) citric acid
Ans. (B) oxalic acid
3. An alkali is a base which :
(A) dissolves in water and is soapy to touch (B) dissolves in water and is sour in taste
(C) does not dissolve in water and is soapy to touch (D) does not dissolve in water and is sour in taste
Ans. (A) dissolves in water and is soapy to touch
4. Soda-acid fire extinguisher contains :
(A) Na2SO4 and HCl (B) NaOH and HCl
(C) NaHCO3 and dil. H2SO4 (D) none of these
Ans. (C) NaHCO3 and dil. H2SO4
5. Out of the following which one is a strong acid ?
(A) CH3COOH (B) H2CO3
(C) HCl (D) All of these
Ans. (C) HCl
44 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

6. Mixing of an acid in water is :

(A) an exothermic reaction (B) an endothermic reaction
(C) neither exothermic nor endothermic (D) depends on the nature of acid
Ans. (A) an exothermic reaction
7. The pH of distilled water is :
(A) 4 (B) 5
(C) 6 (D) 7
Ans. (D) 7
8. CaO is a/an :
(A) acid (B) base
(C) neutral compound (D) salt
Ans. (B) base
9. When zinc reacts with NaOH, the products are :
(A) Na2ZnO2 + H2 (B) Na2ZnO2 + O2
(C) Na2ZnO2 + H2O (D) Na2ZnO2 + H2 + O2
Ans. (A) Na2ZnO2 + H2
10. When a drop of phenolphthalein is added to solution A, it turns pink. The solution A is :
(A) HCl (B) H2SO4
(C) NaOH (D) HNO3
Ans. (C) NaOH
11. The chemical formula of gypsum is :
(A) CaSO4 · 2H2O (B) CaSO4 · 1/2 H2O
(C) CaSO4 · 3/2 H2O (D) CaSO4
Ans. (A) CaSO4 · 2H2O
12. The pH of a neutral solution is :
(A) zero (B) 14
(C) 10 (D) 7
Ans. (D) 7
13. The pH of 1M NaOH will be :
(A) 1 (B) 7
(C) 14 (D) zero
Ans. (C) 14
14. The pH of 1M HCl will be :
(A) zero (B) 1
(C) 7 (D) 14
Ans. (A) zero
15. The pH of an acid is :
(A) 14 (B) more than 14
(C) 7 (D) less than 7
Ans. (D) less than 7
Acids, Bases and Salts 45

16. The pH of a base/alkali is :

(A) zero (B) 0-7
(C) less than 7 (D) more than 7 and less than 14
Ans. (D) more than 7 and less than 14
17. When phenolphthalein is added to a solution, its colour becomes pink, the solution is :
(A) acidic (B) basic
(C) neutral (D) all of these
Ans. (B) basic
18. Acetic acid is found in : [H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-B)]
(A) Sting of Ant (B) Nettle’s sting
(C) Lemon (D) Vinegar
Ans. (D) Vinegar
19. The bases/alkalies ionise in water to produce :
(A) H3O+ ions (B) H+ ions
(C) OH–(aq) ions (D) none of these
Ans. (C) OH–(aq) ions
20. The solutions whose pH is less than 7 are :
(A) neutral (B) acidic
(C) basic (D) none of these
Ans. (B) acidic
21. The solutions whose pH is more than 7 and less than 14 are :
(A) acidic (B) basic
(C) neutral (D) none of these
Ans. (B) basic
22. The pH scale ranges from :
(A) 0 - 7 (B) 7 - 14
(C) 0 - 14 (D) none of these
Ans. (C) 0 - 14
23. Ideal soil pH for growth of the plants is :
(A) zero (B) 14
(C) 6 - 8 (D) 0 - 14
Ans. (C) 6 - 8
24. Yellow colour is produced in basic solution by which of the indicators ?
(A) methyl orange (B) litmus
(C) methyl blue (D) phenolphthalein
Ans. (A) methyl orange
25. Acids are the substances which :
(A) release H+(aq) ions (B) produce H2 gas when react with metals
(C) neutralize bases (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
46 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

26. Which one is a weak acid ?

(A) HCl (B) HNO3
(C) H2SO4 (D) CH3COOH
Ans. (D) CH3COOH
27. Vinegar contains which of the following ?
(A) oxalic acid (B) tartaric acid
(C) acetic acid (D) citric acid
Ans. (C) acetic acid
28. The acid present in the curd is :
(A) tartaric acid (B) lactic acid
(C) citric acid (D) malic acid
Ans. (B) lactic acid
29. The pH of acid rain water is :
(A) 7 (B) more than 5.6
(C) less than 5.6 (D) 14
Ans. (C) less than 5.6
30. pH of human blood is :
(A) 7.4 (B) 8.4
(C) 7.0 (D) 14
Ans. (A) 7.4
31. Which of the two solutions A and B is strong acid : A with pH 1 or B with pH 6 ?
(A) A (B) B
(C) pH has nothing to do with strength (D) A and B both have same strength
Ans. (A) A
32. Citric acid is found in : [H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-C)]
(A) Tomato (B) Tamarind
(C) Lemon (D) Sour milk
Ans. (C) Lemon
33. Baking powder contains :
(A) citric acid (B) tartaric acid
(C) oxalic acid (D) acetic acid
Ans. (B) tartaric acid
34. A solution which turns red litmus blue, its pH will be :
(A) 1 (B) 7
(C) more than 7 and less than 14 (D) zero
Ans. (C) more than 7 and less than 14
35. A solution which turns blue litmus red, its pH will be :
(A) 7 (B) 14
(C) 10 (D) zero, more than zero and less than 7
Ans. (D) zero, more than zero and less than 7
Acids, Bases and Salts 47

36. Indigestion is treated by :

(A) antibiotics (B) analgesics
(C) antacids (D) antiseptics
Ans. (C) antacids
37. A solution showed pH 9. This solution is : [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-A)]
(A) Strongly acidic (B) Strongly alkaline
(C) Weakly acidic (D) Weakly alkaline
Ans. (D) Weakly alkaline
38. Baking soda (NaHCO3) is a/an :
(A) acidic substance (B) basic substance
(C) neutral substance (D) none of these
Ans. (B) basic substance
39. Which of the following substances makes the fruits sour ?
(A) acids (B) bases
(C) salts (D) none of these
Ans. (A) acids
40. Acids and bases react to produce :
(A) salt and hydrogen (B) salt and oxygen
(C) salt and water (D) none of these
Ans. (C) salt and water
41. Which of the following salts is neutral ?
(A) CaCl2 (B) CaCO3
(C) NH4Cl (D) NaCl
Ans. (D) NaCl
42. Which of the following salts is basic ?
(A) KCl (B) NaHCO3
(C) Na2SO4 (D) KNO3
Ans. (B) NaHCO3
43. Name the substance which on treatment with chlorine yields bleaching powder : [2018 (Set-D)]
(A) Gypsum (CaSO4.2H2O) (B) Slaked lime [Ca(OH)2]
(C) Quick lime (CaO) (D) Lime stone (CaCO3)
UAns. (B) Slaked lime [Ca(OH)2]
44. Acids when ionise in water produce :
(A) OH–(aq) ions (B) H+(aq) ions/H3O+ ions
(C) O– –(aq) ions (D) none of these
Ans. (B) H+(aq) ions/H3O+ ions
45. Alkalies/Bases when ionise in water produce :
(A) OH–(aq) ions (B) H3O+(aq) ions
(C) H+(aq) ions (D) none of these
Ans. (A) OH–(aq) ions
48 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

46. Which sodium compound is used for removal of permanent hardness of water ?
(A) NaHCO3 (B) NaOH [H.B.S.E. 2018 (Set-C)]
(C) Na2SO4 (D) Na2CO3.10H2O
Ans. (D) Na2CO3.10H2O
47. The compound used for disinfecting water is :
(A) washing soda (B) baking soda
(C) bleaching powder (D) none of these
Ans. (C) bleaching powder
48. Brine is a concentrated solution of :
(A) Na2CO3 (B) NaHCO3
(C) NaCl (D) Na2SO4
Ans. (C) NaCl
49. Baking powder is a mixture of :
(A) NaHCO3 and tartaric acid (B) NaHCO3 and citric acid
(C) NaHCO3 and oxalic acid (D) NaHCO3 and ascorbic acid
Ans. (A) NaHCO3 and tartaric acid
50. Washing soda (Na2CO3 · 10H2O) is used in :
(A) preparation of glass (B) preparation of soap
(C) paper industry (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
51. Chlor-alkali process is used in the preparation of :
(A) sodium chloride (B) sodium hydroxide
(C) sodium carbonate (D) sodium hydrogencarbonate
Ans. (B) sodium hydroxide
52. Lactic acid is found in :
(A) Orange (B) Tamarind
(C) Lemon (D) Curd
Ans. (D) Curd
53. CO2 is produced when dil. HCl reacts with :
(A) marble (B) limestone
(C) chalk (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
54. Common name of CaSO4 · 2H2O is :
(A) plaster of Paris (B) gypsum
(C) washing soda (D) baking soda
Ans. (B) gypsum
55. Common name of CaOCl2 is :
(A) bleaching powder (B) gypsum
(C) plaster of Paris (D) limestone
Ans. (A) bleaching powder
Acids, Bases and Salts 49

56. Common name of NaHCO3 is : [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-B)]

(A) common salt (B) washing soda
(C) baking soda (D) rock salt
Ans. (C) baking soda
57. To keep the fractured bones in right position, the compound used is :
(A) baking powder (B) plaster of Paris
(C) gypsum (D) rock salt
Ans. (B) plaster of Paris
58. The formula of bleaching powder is :
(A) Ca(OH)2 (B) CaCO3
(C) CaCl2 (D) CaOCl2
Ans. (D) CaOCl2

B. One Word/Sentence Questions

Q.1. What is the cause of sour and bitter taste of food ?
Ans. The sour taste is due to presence of acids and bitter taste is due to presence of bases in the food.
Q.2. Which acid is present in lemon juice ?
Ans. Citric acid.
Q.3. What is the chemical nature of vinegar ?
Ans. Chemically, vinegar is acetic acid : CH3 COOH.
Q.4. Baking soda solution can be used as a remedy for which type of ailments ?
Ans. For acidity.
Q.5. What is the colour change when you add blue litmus to sour substances ?
Ans. Yes, the colour changes from blue to red due to presence of acids.
Q.6. What is the colour change when you add red litmus to bitter substances ?
Ans. Yes, from red to blue due to presence of bases/alkalies.
Q.7. The colour of turmeric changes to reddish brown on treatment with which type of substances?
Ans. On treatment with bases (soaps and detergents).
Q.8. Name two synthetic indicators.
Ans. Phenolphthalein, methyl orange, etc.
Q.9. What are acid-base indicators ?
Ans. The chemical substances which change colour in acidic or alkaline media.
Q.10. Litmus is extracted from which group of plants ?
Ans. From lichens.
Q.11. What are olfactory indicators ?
Ans. The chemical substances which cause a change in smell/odour on treatment with acids and bases.
Q.12. Write chemical equation for reaction of zinc with sodium hydroxide.
Ans. Zn(s) + NaOH(aq)  Na2ZnO2 + H2(g)
Zinc Sodium hyroxide Sodium zincate Hydrogen
50 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.13. When metal carbonates react with acids which gas is produced ?
Ans. Carbon dioxide : CO2
Q.14. What happens when CO2 is passed through limewater ?
Ans. Limewater turns milky due to formation of CaCO3.
Ca(OH)2 + CO2  CaCO3 + H2O
Q.15. If we pass CO2 for a longer period through limewater, what happens ? Give the equation.
Ans. The milky colour of limewater fades away due to formation of soluble Ca(HCO3)2.
CaCO3(s) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)  Ca(HCO3)2 (aq)
Q.16. Give chemical formula of limestone, chalk and marble.
Ans. Calcium carbonate : CaCO3.
Q.17. What is meant by neutralisation ?
Ans. The reaction of an acid with a base to form salt and water is called neutralisation.
Q.18. Write chemical equation for reaction of copper oxide and dil. hydrochloric acid.
Ans. CuO(s) + dil. 2HCl(aq)  CuCl2(aq) + H2O(l)
Q.19. Name two natural indicators.
Ans. Litmus solution and turmeric solution.
Q.20. Write the colour of blue litmus in acidic medium.
Ans. Blue litmus becomes red.
Q.21. What is an alkali ?
Ans. A base which gets dissolved in water.
Q.22. What is the colour of methyl orange in acidic solution ?
Ans. Methyl orange turns pink in acidic medium.
Q.23. When phenolphthalein is added to a solution, it turns pink. What is the nature of the solution?
Ans. It is basic (alkaline) in nature.
Q.24. What do all acids and bases have in common ?
Ans. All acids have H+ ions in common and all bases have OH– ions in common.
Q.25. Give one point of difference between an alkali and a base.
Ans. All alkalies are soluble in water, whereas all bases are not soluble in water.
Q.26. What is meant by dilution ?
Ans. Addition of an acid or a base to water to lower down its strength, is called dilution.
Q.27. What is a universal indicator ?
Ans. An indicator, which is a mixture of a large number of indicators, is called universal indicator, e.g.,
pH indicators.
Q.28. What is the pH of 1M NaOH and 1M HCl ?
Ans. 1 M NaOH pH = 14
1 M HCl pH = 0
Q.29. On what factors does the strength of an acid depend ?
Ans. It depends on ionisation and concentration of H+ ions.
Acids, Bases and Salts 51

Q.30. On what factors does the strength of a base depend ?

Ans. It depends on concentration of OH–(aq) ions and capacity to ionise.
Q.31. What is the pH of rain-water of acid rain ?
Ans. pH 5.6.
Q.32. What is the pH range between which our body works ?
Ans. pH 7.0 to 7.8.
Q.33. Which acid fumes are present in the atmosphere of Venus ?
Ans. Light-yellow fumes of sulphuric acid.
Q.34. Our stomach produces which acid ?
Ans. Hydrochloric acid.
Q.35. What are antacids ?
Ans. The basic substances which are used to neutralise acids in the stomach are called antacids.
Q.36. Give example of common antacid.
Ans. Milk of magnesia : Mg(OH)2 and baking soda : NaHCO3.
Q.37. Give the formula of milk of magnesia.
Ans. [Mg(OH)2] magnesium hydroxide.
Q.38. Name the hardest substance in the body.
Ans. Enamel (the outermost covering of the teeth).
Q.39. What is chemical name of enamel ?
Ans. Calcium phosphate.
Q.40. Name the acid present in curd.
Ans. Lactic acid.
Q.41. Name the natural source of acetic acid.
Ans. Vinegar.
Q.42. Tomato contains which acid ?
Ans. Oxalic acid.
Q.43. Give one example of a strong acid and a weak acid.
Ans. Strong acid Sulphuric acid : H2SO4
Weak acid Acetic acid : CH3COOH.
Q.44. Give one example of a strong base and a weak base.
Ans. Strong base Sodium hydroxide : NaOH
Weak base Calcium hydroxide : Ca(OH)2.
Q.45. What are salts ?
Ans. The compounds produced as a result of reaction of an acid with a base, are called salts.
Q.46. Give two examples of salts belonging to sodium family.
Ans. Sodium chloride : NaCl
Sodium carbonate : Na2CO3.
Q.47. Name two salts belonging to chloride family.
Ans. Sodium chloride : NaCl
Calcium chloride : CaCl2.
52 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.48. Which salts are neutral ?

Ans. The salts of strong acids and strong bases are neutral.
Q.49. How is sodium chloride formed ?
Ans. Sodium hydroxide when reacts with hydrochloric acid, then sodium chloride (NaCl) is formed.
Q.50. Write the chemical name and formula of common salt.
Ans. Sodium chloride : NaCl.
Q.51. Write only chemical equation for preparation of sodium hydroxide by chlor-alkali method.
Ans. 2NaCl(aq) + 2H2O(l)  2NaOH(aq) + Cl2(g) + H2(g)
Sodium chloride Water Sodium hydroxide Chlorine Hydrogen
Q.52. Give chemical name and formula of bleaching powder.
Ans. Calcium oxychloride : CaOCl2.
Q.53. Write chemical name and formula of baking soda.
Ans. Sodium hydrogencarbonate : NaHCO3.
Q.54. What is the nature of baking soda ?
Ans. It is a basic salt.
Q.55. What happens when sodium hydrogencarbonate is heated ?
Ans. When sodium hydrogencarbonate is heated, then it decomposes to produce sodium carbonate,
water and carbon dioxide.
2NaHCO3 Na2CO3 + H2O + CO2
Q.56. Write the chemical name and formula of washing soda.
Ans. Sodium carbonate : Na2CO3 · 10H2O.
Q.57. Write the chemical name and formula of gypsum.
Ans. Calcium sulphate dihydrate : CaSO4 · 2H2O.
Q.58. Give the formula of plaster of Paris.

Ans. Plaster of Paris : CaSO4. H2O.

Q.59. Name the acid present in baking soda.
Ans. Tartaric acid.
Q.60. Name the compound used for casting of statues.
Ans. Plaster of Paris.
Q.61. Calcium sulphate hemihydrate is the chemical name of which substance ?
Ans. Plaster of Paris.

II. Short-Answer Type Questions

Q.1. What are the tastes of acids and bases ? Also write their important tests.
Ans. Acids are sour in taste and bases are bitter in taste. Acids turn blue litmus into red and bases turn
red litmus into blue.
Q.2. What are the types of indicators ? Give their examples.
Ans. Indicators are of two types : (1) Natural indicators, (2) Synthetic indicators.
1. Natural Indicators : Those indicators which are obtained from natural substances such as turmeric,
litmus etc., are called natural indicators.
2. Synthetic Indicators : Those indicators which are synthesised from substances are called synthetic
indicators e.g. methyl orange, phenolphthalein etc.
Acids, Bases and Salts 53

Q.3. How are natural acid-base indicators prepared ?

Ans. Preparation of natural acid-base indicators :
(i) Crush the beetroot in a mortar.
(ii) Add sufficient water to obtain an extract.
(iii) Filter the extract.
(iv) Collect the filtrate to test the substances.
The same method can be used to prepare indicators from red cabbage leaves, coloured petals of some
flowers such as Petunia, Hydrangea and Geranium.
Q.4. Why does the spot of turmeric on cloth became obsolutely brown-red on washing with soap?
Ans. The spot of turmeric natured on a cloth becomes brown on rubbing with basic natured soap.
Turmeric is an indicator and due to basic nature of soap, the spot becomes red-brown in colour, but on
washing with excess water the spot again becomes yellow because basic soap dissolves with water.
Q.5. What are acid-base indicators ? From where litmus is obtained ?
Ans. The red cabbage , turmeric, the coloured petals of flowers like Hydrangea, Petunia, Geranium etc.
Indicate the acid and basic nature of a solution, therefore these are called acid-base indicators or only indicators.
Litmus is obtained from lichen (a plant of group thallophyta). The litmus solution is a violet coloured stain.
Q.6. What are olfactory indicators ?
Ans. Some indicators are such types of substances which change their smells in acidic or basic medium,
these are called olfactory indicators. Onion is an example of such types of indicators.
Q.7. What happens when gypsum is heated to 373 K? Give chemical equation for it.
[H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-A)]
Ans. When gypsum is heated at 373K then it reduce plaster of Paris. The chemical equation of POP is :

 1 1
CaSO 4 .2H 2 O  CaSO4 . H 2 O 1 H 2 O
373K 2 2 water
gypsum
POP

Q.8. Make a list of common bases/alkalies with their chemical names and formulae.
Ans. Name of base Chemical name Formula
Caustic soda Sodium hydroxide NaOH
Lime water Potassium hydroxide KOH
Magnesium hydroxide Mg(OH)2
Milk of magnesia Calcium hydroxide Ca(OH)2
Ammonium hydroxide NH4OH
Q.9. Make a list of some naturally occurring acids.
Ans. Natural source Acid Natural source Acid
Vinegar Acetic acid Orange Citric acid
Tamarind Tartaric acid Tomato Oxalic acid
Curd Lactic acid Lemon Juice Citric acid
Ant sting Methanoic acid Nettle sting Methanoic acid
54 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.10. Give one example where nature provides a neutralisation option.

Ans. Nettle is a plant which grows in forests of hilly areas, has stinging hairs in its leaves which cause
painful stings when touched to the body due to methanoic acid. But the local residents provide its remedy
from the leaves of dock plant grown nearby this plant by rubbing its leaves because there is basic substance in
the leaves of this plant. Thus, clue to neutralisation of acid of Nettle with the basic substance of dock plant the
pain is removed. This is an example of neutralisation that nature provides.
Q.11. What happens when zinc reacts with dilute sulphuric acid ? Write chemical equation too.
Ans. When zinc reacts with dilute sulphuric acid, then zinc sulphate and hydrogen gas is formed
Zn(s) + dil. H2SO4(aq)  ZnSO4(aq) + H2(g)
Q.12. Write the reaction of zinc with sodium hydroxide.
Ans. Reaction of zinc with sodium hydroxide :
2NaOH + Zn Zn2 ZnO2 (aq) + H2
(Sodium zincate)
Q.13. Write equation of Ca(OH)2(aq) with CO2. What conclusion can be drawn from such a
reaction ?
Ans. When CO2 is passed through Ca(OH)2(aq), it turns milky.
Ca(OH)2(aq) + CO2(g)  CaCO3(s) + H2O(l)
(Lime water) (White PP.t)
Conclusion : The non-metal oxides act as acids and when they react with bases, they produce salt and water.
CaCO3(s) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)  Ca(HCO3)2(aq)
(Lime stone, gypsum, marble are the form of CaCO3.) (soluble in water)
Q.14. Write chemical equations for reaction of metals with HCl, HNO3 and CH3COOH.
Ans. (i) Mg(s) + 2HCl(aq)  MgCl2(aq) + H2(g)
(ii) Zn(s) + 2HNO3(aq)  Zn(NO3)2(aq) + H2(g)
(iii) 2Na(s) + 2CH3COOH(aq)  2CH3COONa(aq) + H2(g)
Q.15. How do metal carbonates and metal hydrogencarbonates react with acids ? Give two
equations of the reactions involved.
Ans. When metal carbonates/metal hydrogencarbonates react with acids, then a metal salt, water and
carbon dioxide gas is formed.
Na2CO3(s) + 2HCl (aq)  2NaCl(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)
NaHCO3(s) + HCl(aq)  NaCl(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)
Q.16. What is Neutralisation ? Give three examples of equation.
Ans. Neutralisation : Neutralisation is a reaction of an acid with a base to form salt and water.
Examples : NaOH(aq) + HCl(aq)  NaCl(aq) + H2O(l)
2KOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq)  K2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(l)
Ca(OH)2(aq) + 2HNO3(aq)  Ca(NO3)2(aq) + 2H2O(l)
Q.17. What happens when metal oxides react with acids ?
Ans. When metal oxides (basic in nature) react with acids, they form salts and water.
Bases + Acid  Salt + water
Na2O(s) + H2SO4(aq)  Na2SO4(aq) + H2O(l)
CaO(s) + 2HNO3 (aq)  Ca(NO3)2(aq) + H2O(l)
Q.18. What reaction is taken place between bases and non-metal oxides ?
Ans. Bases form salt and water in the reaction with non-metal oxides (acidic nature).
Ca(OH)2 (aq) + CO2 (g) CaCO3 (s) + H2O (l)
Acids, Bases and Salts 55

Q.19. What is meant by ionisation ? How are hydronium ions formed ?

Ans. When ionic compounds (like acids, bases and salts) are dissolved in water, they get dissociated to
form ions, the process is known as ionisation.
When acids ionise, they release H+(aq) ions into water. But these H+(aq) ions do not occur independently
in aqueous state. They combine with water molecules to form hydronium ions.
HCl(aq) H+(aq) + Cl–(aq)
+
H2O + H (aq) H3O+

Hydronium ion
Q.20. How do the acids ionisetion ? Give three examples.
Ans. The acids in aqueous state ionise to produce H+(aq) ions.
HCl (aq) H+(aq) + Cl–(aq)
HNO3(aq) H+(aq) + NO3–(aq)
H2SO4(aq) 2H+(aq) + SO4– –(aq)
These H (aq) ions combine with water molecules to form hydronium ions H3O+(aq).
+
Q.21. How do the bases/alkalies ionise ?
Ans. The alkalies ionise in aqueous conditions to form hydroxyl ions (OH)–(aq).
NaOH(aq) Na+(aq) + OH–(aq)
KOH(aq) K+(aq) + OH–(aq)
Ca(OH)2(aq) Ca++(aq) + 2OH–(aq)
Q.22. What are alkalis ? Write their properties.
Ans. Alkali : The water soluble bases are called alkalis. Note that all bases are not water soluble.
General properties of alkalis : (i) Like soaps these are slippery in touch.
(ii) These are bitter in taste.
(iii) They are corrosive in nature.
Q.23. What is delution ?
Ans. On the mixing of acid or base in water the (H3O+/OH-) ion concentration is reduced per unit of
volume. This process is called delution. Acid or Base are called as diluted acid or base.
Q.24. Why is it not proper to mix acid or base in water suddenly ?
Ans. The dissolution process of acid or base in water is highly exothermic. Never mix conc. nitric acid
or sulphuric acid in water because due to production of heat the mixture can become out of the test tube and
can make any kind of accident. Due to excessive heat the container used, can also be broke. Acid should be
dissolved slowly in water and the water should be stirred continuously at that moment.
Q.25. What is pH scale ? Explain briefly.
Ans. A scale for measuring hydrogen ion [H+ (aq)] concentration in a given solution, is called pH scale.
On the pH scale, we can measure pH from zero (very acidic) to 14 (very alkaline). So, pH denotes a
number which indicates acidic or basic nature of a solution. Higher the H+(aq) / H3O+(aq) number, lower is
the pH value.

Fig. 2.2 : Variation of pH with the change in concentration of H+(aq) and OH– (aq) ion
56 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

The pH of a neutral solution is 7. Value less than 7 on the pH scale represents an acidic solution. pH
value more than 7 indicates alkaline solution which indicates increase in OH–(aq) ions.
Q.26. Tabulate the pH of some common substances.
Ans. S. No. Solution Approximate pH value Nature of substance
1. Saliva (before meal) 7.5 Alkaline
2. Saliva (after meal) 6.0 Acidic
3. Lemon juice 2.2 - 2.4 Acidic
4. Coffee 4.5 - 5.5 Acidic
5. Tomato juice 4.0 - 4.4 Acidic
6. Blood 7.3 - 7.5 Alkaline
7. Urine 5.5 - 7.5 Acid-alkaline
8. Gastric juice 1.0 - 3.0 Acidic
9. 1 M HCl Zero Highly acidic
10. 1 M NaOH 14 Highly alkaline
11. Wine 2.8 - 3.8 Acidic

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Gastric Lemon juice Pure water, Milk of Sodium

juice (About 2.2) blood magnesia hydroxide solution
(About 1.2) (7.4) (10.4) (About 14)

Fig. 2.3 : pH of some common substances shown on a pH paper (coloure are only a rough guide)

Q.27. What is Acid Rain? How does it affect aquatic life? [H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-C)]
Ans. Acid Rain : When pH of rain water is less than 5.6, then it called acid rain. It is due to the reason
that the gases like SO2, CO2 and NO2 present in atmosphere mixed with rain water and make it acidic.
When acid rain passed through rivers and ponds then it decrease the pH value of these rivers and ponds
for this reason aquatic life became in danger.
Q.28. What are strong and weak bases ?
Ans. Strong bases : The bases which ionise to a great extent, producing large number of hydroxyl OH–
ions, are called strong bases.
Examples : NaOH, KOH.
Weak bases : The alkalies which ionise to lower extent, producing less number of OH–(aq) ions, are
called weak bases.
Examples : Ca(OH)2, Mg(OH)2, etc.
Q.29. Differentiate between strong acid and weak acid ?
Ans. Strong acid : Those acids which ionise to greater extent in aqueous solution are called strong acid.
Ex-HCl, HNO3, H2SO4 .
Weak acid : Those acid which ionise to lower extent, producing less number of H+ (aq) ions are called
weak acids example : Carbonic acid, Acetic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid.
Acids, Bases and Salts 57

Q.30. What is the importance of pH in our daily life ?

Ans. Importance of pH : (i) Plants grow in soil, having specific pH. A change in pH of soil can alter
microflora and fauna of soil.
(ii) pH of HCl secreted in stomach is 2.0 which is acidic. pH of intestinal juice is 7.8 which is alkaline.
Enzymes are pH specific. Any change in pH can inactivate enzymes.
(iii) When the pH of saliva goes down in mouth below 5.5, it can cause tooth decay. It can be due to
production of more acid in the mouth.
(iv) Self-defence by animals.
Bee-sting leaves an acid—formic acid which causes pain and irritation.
(v) Animals and plants are pH sensitive. The pH of rain water, if less than 5.6, will be called acid rain.
It can severely affect ecosystems.
Q.31. Give one example where nature provides a remedy/neutralisation option.
Ans. Nature provides neutralisation options. Nettle (Bichhu Patti as called in Himachal) is a herbaceous
plant which grows in the wild. Its leaves have stinging hair, which cause painful stings when touched accidently.
This is due to methanoic acid secreted by them.
A traditional remedy is rubbing the area with the leaf of the dock plant (commonly known as Palak due
to similarity of leaves with spinach plant) which often grows beside the nettle plant in the wild.
Q.32. Name four families of salts.
Ans. Families of salts :
(i) Sodium salts : NaCl, Na2CO3, NaNO3, etc.
(ii) Calcium salts : CaCl2, CaCO3, Ca3(PO4)2, etc.
(iii) Chloride salts : NaCl, CaCl2, KCl, etc.
(iv) Sulphate salts : Na2SO4, CaSO4, K2SO4, etc.
Q.33. What are acidic salts ? How are they formed ?
Ans. Acidic salts are the salts which are formed by reaction of strong acids with weak bases.
Examples : Ca(OH)2 + 2HCl  CaCl2 + 2H2O
2NH4OH + H2SO4  (NH4)2SO4 + 2H2O
Mg(OH)2 + 2HNO3  Mg(NO3)2 + 2H2O
Q.34. What are basic salts ? How are they formed ?
Ans. The salts with basic properties are called basic salts.
They are formed when strong bases react with weak acids.
Examples : 2NaOH + H2CO3  Na2CO3 + 2H2O
6KOH + 2H3PO4  2K3PO4 + 6H2O
Q.35. What is rock salt ? How was the rock salt formed ?
Ans. Common salt occurring naturally in rocks is called rock salt.
It was formed as a result of reaction of sodium with chlorine in nature. Due to presence of impurities in
rock salt, its colour is brown.
2Na + Cl2  2NaCl
58 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.36. Common salt (NaCl) is a raw material for which substances ?

Ans. Common salt is a raw material for the formation of following compounds :
(i) Sodium hydroxide : NaOH
(ii) Source of chlorine gas : Cl2
(iii) Cl2 obtained from NaCl is used for making bleaching powder : CaOCl2
(iv) It is used for making baking soda : NaHCO3
(v) It is used for making washing soda : Na2CO3 · 10H2O.
Q.37. Briefly describe chlor-alkali process of manufacturing sodium hydroxide.
Or [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-D)]
What is chlor-alkali process? Explain with the help of a chemical equation. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-D)]
Ans. Chlor-Alkali Process : Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) is prepared by passing electricity through an
aqueous solution of sodium chloride, known as brine. Aqueous sodium chloride decomposes to form sodium
hydroxide.
2NaCl(aq) + 2H2O(l)  2NaOH(aq) + Cl2(g) + H2(g)
Sodium hydroxide solution is formed near the cathode.
Q.38. Enlist four uses of sodium hydroxide.
Ans. Uses of sodium hydroxide are given below :
(i) It is used in soap industry. (ii) It is used to prepare rayon.
(iii) It is used as reagent in laboratory. (iv) It is used in paper and textile industry.
Q.39. What is the common name of CaOCl2? Give the chemical reaction by which it is prepared.
Or [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-B)]
What is chemical formula of bleaching powder ? Give chemical equation used in its preparation.
[H.B.S.E. March, 2019(Set-B)]
Ans. Bleaching powder is calcium oxychloride CaOCl2. It is produced by the action of chlorine on dry
slaked lime Ca(OH)2.
Ca(OH)2 + Cl2  CaOCl2 + H2O
Calcium Chlorine Calcium oxychloride Water
hydroxide
*Chlorine obtained from decomposition of sodium chloride is used for this purpose.
Q.40. Enlist three uses of bleaching powder. [Sample Paper, 2019]
Ans. Uses of bleaching powder are given below :
(i) For bleaching cotton and linen in textile industry.
For bleaching wood-pulp in paper industry.
(ii) For disinfecting drinking water.
(iii) As an oxidising agent in many chemical processes.
Q.41. How is baking soda (Sodium hydrogencarbonate : NaHCO3) prepared ? Describe in brief.
Ans. The raw material used for production of baking soda is sodium chloride, CO2, H2O and NH3
(ammonia). [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-A)]
NaCl + H2O + CO2 + NH3  NaHCO3 + NH4Cl
Sodium chloride Water Carbon Ammonia Sodium Ammonium
dioxide hydrogencarbonate chloride
Q.42. Enlist four uses of baking soda.
Ans. Uses of baking soda are given below :
(i) As ingredient of baking powder, it is used in bakery.
(ii) As ingredient of antacids. Being alkaline, it neutralises excess acid in stomach.
Acids, Bases and Salts 59

(iii) It is also used in soda-acid fire extinguishers.

(iv) In kitchen, it is used for faster cooking.
Q.43. How is washing soda prepared ? Describe in brief. [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-C)]
Ans. Washing soda is prepared by Solvay process, first of all, sodium hydrogencarbonate is prepared.
NaCl + H2O + CO2 + NH3  NaHCO3 + NH4Cl
Then sodium hydrogencarbonate is heated, it decomposes to produce sodium carbonate.

2NaHCO3 Na2CO3 + H2O + CO2

After this sodium carbonate Na2CO3 is recrystallised to produce Na2CO3 · 10H2O which is washing
soda.
Na2CO3 + 10H2O  Na2CO3·10H2O
Washing soda
Q.44. Enlist four uses of washing soda.
Ans. Uses of washing soda are given below :
(i) Washing soda is used in glass, soap and paper industry.
(ii) It is used in preparation of sodium compounds such as borax.
(iii) It is used as cleaning agent as an ingredient of washing powder.
(iv) It is used for removing permanent hardness of water.
Q.45. Give chemical names and formulae of four salts with water of crystallisation.
Ans. Copper sulphate : CuSO4 · 5H2O
Ferrous sulphate : FeSO4 · 7H2O
Sodium carbonate : Na2CO3 · 10H2O
Calcium sulphate : CaSO4 · 2H2O
Q.46. What is plaster of Paris ? How is it obtained from gypsum ?
Ans. Calcium sulphate hemihydrate is known as plaster of Paris.
It is obtained by heating of gypsum.
CaSO4 · 2H2O CaSO4 · ½H2O + 1½ H2O
or 2CaSO4·2H2O 2CaSO4· ½H2O + 3H2O
Gypsum Plaster of Paris Water
Q.47. Enlist four uses of plaster of Paris.
Ans. Uses of plaster of Paris are given below :
(i) It is used for making toys, decoration pieces, statues, etc.
(ii) It is used for making the surface smooth.
(iii) It is used as an ingredient of cement.
(iv) It is used to keep the fractured bones in position.
Q.48. How is a soda-acid fire extinguisher prepared ?
Ans. Method of preparation of a soda-acid fire extinguisher.
Principle : The reactions of acid with metal hydrogencarbonates is used in fire extinguisher which
produce CO2 gas.
(i) Take 20 ml of NaHCO3 solution in a wash-bottle.
(ii) Suspend an ignition tube containing dil.H2SO4 in the wash-bottle.
60 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

(iii) Close the mouth of the wash-bottle.

(iv) Tilt the wash bottle so that the acid from the ignition tube mixes with the NaHCO3 solution.
(v) You will observe an effervescence coming out of the nozzle.
(vi) Direct this gas on a burning candle.

III. Essay-Type Questions

Q.1. Write the name of acids and bases are used to prepare Sodium chloride, Potassium nitrate,
Ammonium chloride, Zinc sulphate, Copper sulphate, Sodium acetate, Sodium carbonate and Sodium
hydrogen carbonate.
Ans. (i) Sodium chloride : NaCl
NaOH + HCl  NaCl + H2O
Sodium hydroxide Hydrochloric acid

(ii) Potassium nitrate : KNO3

KOH + HNO3  KNO3 + H2O
Potassium hydroxide Nitric acid

(iii) Ammonium chloride : NH4Cl

NH4OH + HCl  NH4Cl + H2O
Ammonium hyroxide Hydrochloric acid

(iv) Zinc sulphate : ZnSO4

Zn(OH)2 + H2SO4  ZnSO4 + H2O
Zinc hydroxide Sulphuric acid

(v) Copper sulphate : CuSO4

Cu(OH)2 + H2SO4  CuSO4 + H2O
Copper hydroxide Sulphuric acid

(vi) Sodium acetate : CH3COONa

CH3COOH + NaOH  CH3COONa + H2O
Acetic acid Sodium hydroxide

(vii) Sodium carbonate : Na2CO3

2NaOH + H2CO3  Na2CO3 + 2H2O
Sodium hydroxide Carbonic acid
Acids, Bases and Salts 61

(viii) Sodium hydrogencarbonate : NaHCO3

NaOH + H2CO3 + H2O  NaHCO3 + 2H2O
Sodium hydroxide Carbonic acid Water
Q.2. Enlist various products of chlor-alkali process and write their uses.
Ans. Chlor-alkali process leads to the formation of chlorine gas, an alkali (NaOH) and hydrogen gas.
The process can be summarised in the form of following equation :
2NaCl(aq) + 2H2O(l)  2NaOH(aq) + Cl2(g) + H2(g)
Sodium chloride Water Sodium hyroxide Chlorine Hydrogen
(a) Uses of sodium hydroxide :
(i) It is used in soap industry for hydrolysis of fats/oils.
(ii) It is used in paper and textile industry.
(iii) It is used in preparation of rayon.
(iv) It is used as laboratory reagent.
(b) Uses of chlorine gas (Cl2) :
(i) It is used in preparation of bleaching powder.
(ii) It is used for disinfecting water.
(iii) It is used for preparation of chloro-hydrocarbons like chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, etc.
(iv) It is used for preparation of chlorofloro-carbons (CFCs) used in refrigeration.
62 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

(c) Uses of hydrogen gas (H2) :

(i) Hydrogen is used as industrial fuel.
(ii) It is used as a rocket fuel/propellant.
(iii) It is used for hydrogenation of oils into fats.
(iv) It is used for converting unsaturated hydrocarbons into saturated hydrocarbons.

IMPORTANT EXPERIMENTAL QUESTIONS/ACTIVITIES

Experiment 1. Collect the following samples from the science laboratory : hydrochloric acid (HCl),
sulphuric acid (H2SO4), nitric acid (HNO3), acetic acid (CH3COOH), sodium hydroxide (NaOH), calcium
hydroxide [Ca(OH)2], potassium hydroxide (KOH), magnesium hydroxide [Mg(OH)2], and ammonium
hydroxide (NH4OH).
• What change in colour did you observe with red litmus, blue litmus, phenolphthalein and methyl
orange solutions for each of the solutions taken ?
• Tabulate your observations in the table.
Requirement : Different samples, indicators, slides, test tubes.
Procedure : Put a drop of each of the above solutions on a watch glass and test with a drop of the
following indicators as shown in the table.
Observation :
S. Chemicals Sample Red Blue Phenolph- Methyl
No. solution litmus litmus thalein orange
solution solution solution
1. Hydrochloric acid HCl No change Red No change Pink
2. Sulphuric acid H2SO4 No change Red No change Pink
3. Nitric acid HNO3 No change Red No change Pink
4. Acetic acid CH3COOH No change Red No change Pink
5. Sodium hydroxide NaOH Blue No change Pink Yellow
6. Calcium hydroxide Ca(OH)2 Blue No change Pink Yellow
7. Potassium hydroxide KOH Blue No change Pink Yellow
8. Magnesium hydroxide Mg(OH)2 Blue No change Pink Yellow
9. Ammonium hydroxide NH4OH Blue No change Pink Yellow
Conclusion : Different acid-base indicators give different colours.
Result : In different solutions acids/base are indicative of the nature of substance.
Experiment 2. Give an activity to show the use of olfactory (smell) indicators.
Requirement : Onions, some acid and base solutions, strips of clean cloth.
Procedure :
(i) Take some finely chopped onions in a plastic bag.
(ii) Put some strips of clean cloth into the plastic bag.
(iii) Tightly tie-up the bag and leave for over night in the fridge.
Acids, Bases and Salts 63

(iv) Take two of these cloth strips and check their odour.
(v) Keep them on a clean surface and place a few drops of dil. HCl solution on a strip and a few drops
of dil. NaOH solution on the other.
(vi) Rinse both cloth strips with water and again check their odour.
Observation : Note your observations.
Result : The odour of different substances is due to different volatile chemicals in presence of which
can be detected by olfactory receptors.
Experiment 3. How do acids react with metals ?
Requirement : Zinc granules, dil. H2SO4, test tube, cork, delivery tube, soap, candle, etc.
Procedure :
(i) Set the apparatus as shown in the figure.
(ii) Take about 5 ml dil. H2SO4 acid and put a few granules of zinc into it.
(iii) A gas evolves. Pass the gas evolved through soap solution.
(iv) Take a burning candle near a gas-filled bubble.

Observation : The gas produced burns with a pop-sound.

Result : The gas produced is hydrogen.
Conclusion : When acids react with metals, hydrogen gas is evolved. Reaction can be written as :
Zn(s) + dil. H2SO4 (aq)  ZnSO4(aq) + H2(g)

Experiment 4. How do metal carbonates/metal hydrogencarbonates react with acids ?

Requirement : Test tubes, delivery tubes, metal carbonates, bicarbonates, dil. HCl, limewater, etc.
Procedure :
(i) Take two test tubes. Mark them as A and B.
64 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

(ii) Take about 0.5 g of sodium carbonate

(Na 2 CO 3 ) in test tube A and 0.5 g of sodium
hydrogencarbonate in test tube B.
(iii) Add 2 ml of dil. HCl to both the test
tubes.
(iv) Observe and pass the gas evolved through
limewater [Ca(OH)2] solution.
Observation : A gas is evolved which turns
limewater milky.
Result : The gas produced is CO2.
Conclusion : When acids react with carbonates
or hydrogencarbonates, they produce CO 2 gas.
Reaction can be written as
Na2CO3 + 2HCl  2NaCl + CO2 + H2O
Experiment 5. Prove that reactive metals react
with strong bases to evolve hydrogen gas.
Requirement : Zinc granules, NaOH solution, test tube, delivery tube.
Method : Set the apparatus as given in experiment 3.
(i) Place a few pieces of granulated zinc metal in a test tube.
(ii) Add 2 ml of NaOH solution and warm the contents of the test tube.
(iii) Pass the gas through soap water.
(iv) Light the bubbles with burning candle.
Observation : The gas produced, burns with a pop-sound.
Result : Hydrogen gas is produced when a base, like NaOH reacts with zinc metal.
The reaction can be written as :
2NaOH + Zn  Na2ZnO2 + H2
Sodium hydroxide Zinc Sodium zincate Hydrogen

Experiment 6. Show by an activity, how do acids and bases react with each other.
Requirement : An acid and a base of known strength, test tubes, an indicator like phenolphthalein.
Procedure :
(i) Take about 2 ml of dilute NaOH solution in a test tube.
(ii) Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein, the colour changes to pink.
(iii) Add dil. HCl solution drop by drop.
(iv) The pink colour of solution disappears.
(v) Now, add a few drops of NaOH to the above mixture.
(vi) The pink colour of solution reappears.
Observation : The base NaOH shows pink colour when phenolphthalein is added. But when its
neutralisation occurs with acid – HCl, its colour is gone.
Result : The following neutralisation reaction takes place :
dil. NaOH(aq) + dil. HCl(aq)  NaCl(aq) + H2O(l)
Acids, Bases and Salts 65

Experiment 7. What happens when metallic oxides react with acids ?

Requirement : Metallic oxide like copper oxide, dil. HCl, test tubes, etc.
Procedure :
(i) Take a small amount of copper oxide in a beaker.
(ii) Add dil. HCl(aq) slowly while stirring.
(iii) Note the colour of the solution.
Observation :
(i) The colour of the solution becomes blue-green.
(ii) Copper oxide dissolves.
Result : The reaction may be written as
CuO + dil.2HCl(aq)  CuCl2(aq)+ H2O
Copper oxide Copper chloride
So, when metal oxides react with acids, then salts and water are formed.
Experiment 8. Prove that all the compounds containing hydrogen are not acidic in nature.
Requirement : Glucose, alcohol, HCl, H2SO4, a beaker, a rubber cork, 6V battery, connecting wires,
two nails, etc.
Procedure :
(i) Take solutions of glucose, alcohol, HCl(aq),
H2SO4(aq), etc.
(ii) Fix two nails on a cork and place the cork
in100 ml beaker.
(iii) Connect the nails to the two terminals of a
6V battery through a bulb and a switch.
(iv) Now, pour some dil. HCl(aq) in the beaker
and switch on the circuit.
(v) Repeat the experiment separately with
H2SO4(aq), glucose, alcohol solutions.
Observation : The bulb glows only in case of
HCl(aq) and H2SO4(aq). It does not glow in case of
glucose and alcohol.
Result : The solution of acids HCl(aq) and
H2SO4(aq) conduct electricity, whereas the solutions
of glucose and alcohol do not conduct electricity.
Conclusion : Aqueous solutions of acids conduct electricity, while aqueous solutions of organic
compounds, like glucose and alcohol do not ionise, hence do not conduct electricity.
Experiment 9. Prove that acids behave as acids only in aqueous solution.
Requirement : Sodium chloride, H2SO4(aq), blue litmus, test tubes, flask, etc.
Procedure :
(i) Take about 1 g of solid NaCl in a clean and dry test tube.
(ii) Add some concentrated H2SO4 to the test tube.
(iii) Observe for the gas coming out of delivery tube.
(iv) Test the gas evolved with dry and wet litmus paper.
66 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Precaution : If the climate is very humid,

you will have to pass the gas produced, through
a guard tube (dry tube) containing calcium
chloride to dry the gas.

Observation : The colour of the dry

litmus paper does not change, whereas the
colour of wet blue litmus becomes red.

Conclusion : When NaCl reacts with

concentrated H2SO4, hydrogen chloride gas is
formed.
2NaCl(s) + Conc. H2SO4 Na2SO4 + 2HCl
Hydrogen chloride ionises only in presence of moisture/water and so its acidic character whereas in dry
condition, it does not produce H+(aq) ions and remains non-reactive with the litmus.
Experiment 10. Prove that ionisation of an acid or a base is an exothermic reaction.
Requirement : Beaker, sulphuric acid, water, etc.
Procedure :
(i) Take about 10 mL water in a beaker.
(ii) Add a few drops of conc. H2SO4 to it. Swirl the beaker slowly.
(iii) Touch the base of the beaker.
Note : The same activity can be repeated with NaOH pellets.
Observation : The water becomes warm after addition of sulphuric acid to it.
Result : Ionisation of an acid/base is an exothermic reaction. It may be written as :
H2SO4(aq) 2H+(aq) + SO4– –(aq) + Heat
Experiment 11. To determine the pH of various substances with the help of pH paper.
Requirement : pH paper range 0 – 14, solutions of various substances to be tested for pH.
Procedure : Add two drops of each substance to be tested on separate pH papers and note the colour
change. Then compare the colour with the reference pH card and note the pH.
Observation and Result :
S.No. Solution Colour of Approximate pH Nature of
pH paper value substance
1. Saliva (before meal) Bluish green 7.5 Basic
2. Saliva (after meal) Yellowish green 6.0 Acidic
3. Lemon juice Light red 2.2 Acidic
4. Vinegar Reddish yellow 4.0 Acidic
5. Tomato juice Reddish yellow 4.0 Acidic
6. Coffee Reddish green 5.0 Acidic
7. Soft drink Yellowish green 6 Slightly acidic
8. Tap water Green 7 Neutral
9. 1 M NaOH Dark blue 14 Highly basic
10. 1 M HCl Red Zero Highly acidic
Acids, Bases and Salts 67

Experiment 12. To test the pH of different soils.

Requirement : Soil samples from different fields, gardens, filter papers, pH papers.
Procedure :
(i) Put about 2g soil in a test tube and add 5 mL water to it.
(ii) Shake the contents of the test tube.
(iii) Filter the contents and collect the filtrate in a test tube.
(iv) Check the pH of the filtrate with the help of pH paper.
Observation and Result : The pH of different soils collected from different places may differ in their
pH value.
Experiment 13. To test for water of crystallisation in salts.
Requirement : Test tubes, burner, test tube holder,
crystals of copper sulphate.
Procedure :
(i) Note the colour of copper sulphate crystals.
(ii) Heat the crystals in a dry boiling tube.
(iii) Note the colour after heating.
(iv) Add 4-5 drops of water on the sample after heating
and observe the colour change.
Observation : (i) When copper sulphate crystals are
heated, then their bluish colour fades away and water drops
are seen on the walls of the test tube. (ii) After heating, the
salt becomes white, but when we add water drops to it, then
its bluish colour is restored.
Result : Copper sulphate crystals (blue in colour)
contain water of crystallisation.
Its formula is CuSO4 · 5H2O.


 BIOLOGY
BIOLOGY

6 LIFE PROCESSES

SCIENTIFIC TERMS
1. Life : Life is the result of biochemical reactions (metabolic processes).
2. Life processes : The processes like nutrition, respiration which help to maintain life.
3. Nutrition : The intake of food (nutrients) and its subsequent utilization for growth, development
and maintenance of body.
4. Respiration : Oxidation of food (glucose) to release energy for maintenance of life processes.
5. Excretion : Removal of waste products produced as a result of metabolic processes from the
body.
6. Autotrophs : The chlorophyll possessing organisms like green plants and some bacteria which
can photosynthesize.
7. Enzymes : Enzymes are biocatalysts which can change (generally increase) the rate of biochemical
reactions. They catalyse metabolic reactions.
8. Heterotrophs : The organisms like animals, man which cannot photosynthesize, cannot synthesize
their own food material, are called heterotrophs.
9. Autotrophic nutrition : It involves synthesis of organic substances from inorganic raw material
and its subsequent utilization for maintaining life processes.
10. Photosynthesis : The conversion of solar/light energy into chemical energy by green plants.
11. Chloroplasts : The cell organelles in the plant cells which contain chlorophyll and which are
associated with the process of photosynthesis.
12. Chlorophyll : The green coloured pigment in plants which can absorb solar energy.
13. Stomata : These are specialised pores in the leaf surface (more on lower surface) and meant for
exchange of gases (CO2/O2) and transpiration.
14. Biological nitrogen fixation : Conversion of free nitrogen of air into nitrogen compounds by
microbes.
15. Heterotrophic nutrition : Nutrition which involves intake of food synthesized by plants, directly
or indirectly and its subsequent utilization by heterotrophs.
16. Parasites : The organisms which draw nutrition from other organisms by living in or on the body
other organisms (Host) causing damage to them.
17. Parasitic mode of nutrition : Nutrition which involves parasite-host interaction, may or may
not lead to death of the host.

cont...
195
196 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

18. Saliva : The watery fluid secreted in the mouth, which contains carbohydrate digesting enzyme
amylases.
19. Salivary glands : The glands present in buccal cavity and below tongue from which saliva is
secreted.
20. Amylases : A group of carbohydrate digesting enzymes.
21. Proteases : A group of proteins digesting enzymes.
22. Lipases : A group of lipid/fats digesting enzymes.
23. Dental Caries : Tooth decay which causes gradual softening of enamel and dentine, causes
inflammation and infection.
24. Bile juice : The secretion of liver which contain lot of salts for emulsification of fats.
25. Liver : It is the largest gland in the body which secretes digestive juice-bile.
26. Pancreas : It is a digestive gland present in the fold of intestine. It secretes pancreatic juice
which contains amylases, proteases, lipases enzymes.
27. Villi : The finger like projection of the wall of intestine. These are meant to increase absorptive
surface.
28. Fermentation : The process of decomposition of complex organic compounds like sugar into
simple substances like alcohol by microbes or enzymes, is called fermentation.
29. ATP : Adenosine triphosphate. It is energy currency of the cell.
30. Diffusion : The movement of substances from their higher concentration to lower concentration
under concentration gradient is called diffusion.
31. Lungs : Two balloon like spongy organs meant for breathing (exchange of gases in vertebrates
except fishes). They are highly vascularised.
32. Alveoli : In the lungs, the air passage divides into smaller and smaller tubes which finally terminates
into balloon like structures, called alveoli, where exchange of gases takes place.
33. Gills : The membranous organs for gaseous exchange in fishes and some crustaceans.
34. Haemoglobin : The red coloured protein present in blood which transports O2/CO2.
35. Blood : It is a fluid connective tissue which is generally red in colour and is a means of transport
for many substances.
36. Heart : Heart is a muscular pumping organ which pumps blood to different parts of the body.
37. Double circulation : In four chambered heart (in aves, mammals) the same blood goes through
the heart twice during each cycle, one time as deoxygenated and other time as oxygenated, is
called double circulation.
38. Blood Pressure : The force that blood exerts against the wall of a blood vessel is called blood
pressure.
39. Hypertension : High blood pressure is called hypertension.
40. Lymph : The fluid present in intercellular spaces in the tissues, which also help in transportation.
It contains some plasma, little proteins and blood cells called lymphocytes.
41. Platelets : The blood corpuscles which help in clotting of blood at the injured site and stop the
bleeding.
42. Transpiration : The loss of water in the form of vapours from the surface of plant parts like
leaves and young stem through special pores called stomata, is called transpiration.
cont...
Life Processes 197

43. Translocation : The transportation of substances (like food – sugars) from one part of the plant
to the other parts, is called translocation.
44. Nephrons : The functional unit of kidney which is formed of highly coiled tubules is called
nephron.
45. Dialysis : The removal/separation of larger and smaller molecules present in a fluid through a
selectively permeable membrane (or cellophane-dialysing) membrane.
46. Hemodialysis : Filtration of blood through an (artificial) membrane to get rid of nitrogenous
waste like urea and uric acid is called hemodialysis.
47. Nutrients : The substances which provide nourishment e.g., proteins, carbohydrates, fats, vitamins,
etc.
48. Phagocytosis : The process of intake of solid food by a cell is called phagocytosis.
49. Digestion process : The process of simplification of complex food articles into absorbable soluble
simple substances, with the help of enzymes.
50. Arteries : The blood vessels carrying oxygenated blood from the heart to different parts of the
body.
51. Veins : The blood vessels collecting/carrying deoxygenated blood.
52. Xylem : The tissue in plants which carries minerals and water absorbed by the roots.
53. Phloem : The tissue in plants which carries food synthesized by the leaves to different parts of
the plant.
54. Blood capillaries : The fine blood vessels with single cell thick walls.
55. Bowman’s capsule : The cup shaped structure of a nephron.
56. Glomerulus : A network of blood capillaries present in Bowman’s capsule of a nephron.

CHAPTER AT A GLANCE
1. Life is maintained by certain basic processes like nutrition, respiration, circulation, excretion,
reproduction, etc.
2. All life processes need input of energy in the form of ATP.
3. ATP is considered as energy currency of the cell. Nothing happens without exchange of energy in
the cells.
4. ATPs are synthesized due to oxidation of nutrients like glucose and the process is known as
respiration.
5. The nutrients : carbohydrates, fats, proteins, etc. are inhaled and digested in the body to get
diffusible substances which as a raw materials for various life processes.
6. Nutrition is broadly of two types : autotrophic and heterotrophic.
7. Autotrophic nutrition is carried out by green plants and certain bacteria which by process of
photosynthesis convert solar energy into chemical energy.
8. Photosynthesis requires, chlorophyll, water, CO2 and light energy.
9. In plants, exchange of gases takes place through specialised pores called stomata. Opening and
closing of stomata is brought about by guard cells.
10. Plants require minerals (N, P, Fe, Mg, K, etc.) and water which they absorb from soil by their
roots. cont...
198 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

11. The organisms which obtain their food from plants directly or indirectly are called heterotrophy.
12. The organisms like amoeba and paramecium food is engulfed by process of phagocytosis.
13. In human beings we have a special system for digestion of food : the digestive system. It comprises
of alimentary canal and associated glands : liver and pancreas.
14. Digestion of food takes place with the help of bio-catalysts, the enzymes. Thereafter food is
absorbed and assimilated into the body.
15. Respiration can take place in absence or presence of O2/air. The respiration which take place in
absence of O2 is called anaerobic respiration and releases small amount of energy, ethanol or
lactic acid and CO2.
16. Aerobic respiration which takes place in mitochondria releases lot of energy due to complete
oxidation of glucose. The energy released is utilised in synthesis of ATP.
17. The rate of breathing in aquatic organisms is much faster as the amount of dissolved oxygen in
water is fairly low.
18. Humans have a pair of lungs, trachea for breathing which ultimately form balloon like structures
called alveoli.
19. For transportation in humans we have fluid connective tissue called blood and lymph.
20. For pumping of blood to different parts of the body we have a muscular organ called heart, blood
vessels called arteries, veins and blood capillaries.
21. The blood get oxygenated in the lungs.
22. The force that blood exerts against the wall of a vessel is called blood pressure which is measured
by an instrument called sphygmomanometer. High blood pressure is called hypertension.
23. Platelets help in clotting of blood at the site of injury.
24. Lymph is another fluid tissue, which is also protective in nature due to the presence of lymphocytes.
25. Transportation of water and minerals takes place through xylem tissue and that of sugar and
other nutrients through phloem tissue.
26. The removal of waste is carried out by a pair of kidneys in humans.
27. The functional unit of kidney is called nephron which is a tubular structure involved in filtration
of blood and formation of urine.
28. In case of kidney failure, kidneys need to be transplanted or for a short period hemodialysis is
carried out by means of artificial (kidney) system.
29. Substances like gums, resins, etc. are excreted by plants in addition to O2 in day time and CO2 at
night.

Questions on Article 6.1 (PAGE–95)

Q.1. Why is diffusion insufficient to meet the oxygen requirements of multicellular organisms like
humans ?
Ans. In multicellular organisms like humans, the body size is very large and the body design is complex.
In multicellular organisms, all the cells cannot be in direct contact with the surrounding environment. Thus,
simple diffusion will not meet the requirement of all the cells.
Life Processes 199

Q.2. What criteria do we use to decide whether something is alive ?

Ans. Criteria to decide whether something is alive :
(i) Body movements
(ii) Growth and development,
(iii) Breathing/respiration,
(iv) Nutrition,
(v) Celled organisation,
(vi) Reproduction or death.
Q.3. What are outside raw materials used for by an organism ?
Ans. The outside raw materials are used for the following purpose by an living organism :
(i) For maintenance of life processes.
(ii) For respiration to release energy for various processes.
(iii) For synthesis of proteins, enzymes, nucleic acids.
(iv) For formation and repair of tissues, cells.
Q.4. What processes would you consider essential for maintaining life ?
Ans. Processes for maintaining life :
(i) Nutrition (ii) Respiration
(iii) Transportation (iv) Excretion
(v) Growth and Development (vi) Reproduction
(vii) Movements (viii) Adaptability
(ix) Response to stimuli.
Questions on Article 6.2 (PAGE–101)
Q.1. What are the differences between autotrophic nutrition and heterotrophic nutrition ?
Ans. Differences between autotrophic and heterotrophic nutrition are :
Autotrophic nutrition Heterotrophic nutrition
(i) The nutrition in which organisms (green (i) The type of nutrition in which organisms
plants) synthesize their food from inorganic depend on plants directly or indirectly for
substances, is called autotrophic nutrition. their food, is called heterotrophic nutrition.
(ii) It requires presence of chlorophyll. (ii) It does not require presence of chlorophyll.
(iii) All green plants and certain bacteria can (iii) All animals and fungi protists adopt this
adopt this mode of nutrition. mode of nutrition.
Q.2. Where do plants get each of the raw materials required for photosynthesis ?
Ans. The plants require water, minerals, carbon dioxide and energy for photosynthesis.
(i) They get water and minerals from soil.
(ii) They get CO2 from air.
(iii) Energy from sun in the form of solar radiations.
Q.3. What is the role of the acid in our stomach ?
Ans. Gastric juice secreted from stomach contains hydrochloric acid (HCl) whose pH is nearly 2.0. It
performs the following functions :
(i) It provides acidic medium for enzymes to act, help in conversion of pepsinogen to pepsin which is an
active form.
200 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

(ii) It kills microbes if presents in food.

(iii) It softens the food.
Q.4. What is the function of digestive enzymes ?
Ans. The food which we eat contains complex nutrients like carbohydrates, fats, proteins which our
body cannot absorb and use as such. The digestive enzymes digest (simplify) the food into absorbable form.
Proteins Amino acids

Carbohydrates Glucose

Fats  Fatty acids/glycerides

These substances are absorbed and assimilated by our body.
Q.5. How is the small intestine designed to absorb digested food ?
Ans. The small intestine is the main site of absorption of digested food. The inner wall of the small
intestine is folded in the form of finger like processes called villi which increases the absorptive surface
manifold. Moreover the wall of the intestine is richly supplied with blood vessels for quick absorption and
transportation of nutrients.

Questions on Article 6.3 (PAGE –105)

Q.1. What advantage over an aquatic organism does a terrestrial organism have with regard to
obtaining oxygen for respiration ? [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-B)]
Ans. The aquatic organisms have gills or moist skin to absorb oxygen. For oxygen they depend on
dissolved oxygen in water. The solubility of O2 in water is very low. Their breathing/respiration is very high
(to get required quantity of O2) as compared to terrestrial organisms.
The terrestrial organisms on the other hand depend on air for O2. Air contains large quantity of O2
(21%). These organisms have lungs for breathing which are much efficient than the gills. So, the terrestrial
organisms get rich supply of O2.

Q.2. What are the different ways in which glucose is oxidised to provide energy in various
organisms? [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-A)]
Ans. Glucose on oxidation yields energy and is the chief raw material for respiration process. The
extent to which oxidation of glucose takes place depends on availability of oxygen and the type of organisms.
(i) In all organisms glycolysis takes place and glucose is converted into pyruvate, a three carbon
compound. This process takes place in cytoplasm.

+
energy

Fig. 6.1 : Breakdown of glucose by various pathways

Life Processes 201

(ii) In anaerobic organisms like yeasts pyruvate is converted into ethanol and CO2 and some energy is
released.
(iii) During vigorous exercise, in muscles, pyruvate is converted into lactic acid and some energy is
released.
(iv) The complete oxidation of pyruvate in sufficient supply of oxygen lead to formation of CO2 and
H2O and lot of energy is released.
This complete oxidation of glucose takes place in mitochondria.
Q.3. How is oxygen and carbon dioxide transported in human beings ? [H.B.S.E. 2019 (Set-B, C)]
Ans. (a) Transport of oxygen (O2) in Human blood :
(i) Oxygen has high affinity for haemoglobin. It combines with haemoglobin to form
oxyhaemoglobin, in which form, 97% of oxygen is transported.
(ii) Blood plasma also dissolves oxygen. Nearly 3% of O2 is transported in this form.
(b) Transport of carbon dioxide (CO2) :
(i) As bicarbonates : Nearly 70% of CO2 is transported to lungs in the form of sodium and
potassium bicarbonates.
(ii) As carbamino haemoglobin : Nearly 23% of CO2 is transported in combination with
haemoglobin.
(iii) As carbonic acid : Nearly 7% of CO2 is transported in blood as carbonic acid.
H2O + CO2  H2CO3
Q.4. How are the lungs designed in human beings to maximise the area for exchange of
gases ? [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-B)]
Ans. The respiratory tract, trachea and bronchi leads into a pair of lungs located in the thoracis cavity.
The bronchi divides into bronchioles which finally terminate into balloon like structures called, alveoli. The
walls of alveoli contain an extensive network of blood vessels. They provide a surface where the exchange of
gases can take place. If the alveolar surface is spread out, it would cover about 80 m2. Because of this large
surface area exchange of gases becomes quite efficient.
Questions on Article 6.4 (PAGE–110)
Q.1. What are the components of the transport system in human beings ? What are functions of
these components? Or
What is difference between lymph and blood. [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-C)]
Ans. The components of transport system in Human beings are :
(a) Heart, (b) Blood, (c) Blood vessels : (i) Arteries, (ii) Veins, (iii) Capillaries, (d) Lymph and Lymphatic
ducts.
Functions of these components :
(a) Heart : Heart is the main pumping organ, it pumps the blood to different parts of the body.
(b) Blood : Blood is the fluid connective tissue which transports redistribute different substances to
different parts.
(c) Blood vessels : Arteries carry oxygenated blood to different parts of the body. Veins collect
deoxygenated blood from different parts of the body. Blood capillaries supply and collect blood to/from
different tissues.
(d) Lymph and Lymphatic : Lymph is another fluid connective tissue present in interstitial spaces
and protects the body against infections.
202 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.2. Why is it necessary to separate oxygenated and deoxygenated blood in mammals and birds ?
Ans. Mammals and birds are very active animals and require lot of energy for their body. For getting
large quantity of energy, they require sufficient supply of oxygen. It can only be possible if the oxygenated
and deoxygenated blood do not get mixed.
This also maintains their body temperature.
Q.3. What are the components of the transport system in highly organised plants ?
Ans. The highly organised plants are the vascular plants (Pteridophytes, Gymnosperms, Angiosperms)
with highly developed conducting tissues. The conducting tissue comprises of xylem and phloem.
(a) Xylem : It is a compound tissue which transports water and minerals absorbed by the roots to
different parts of the plant.
(b) Phloem : It is a conducting tissue which transports food (sugars) synthesized by the leaves and
hormones synthesized by the shoot tip to different parts of the plant, where they are required.
Q.4. How are water and minerals transported in plants ? [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-C)]
Ans. Water and minerals are transported in plants through xylem tissue. In xylem tissue, the tracheids
and vessels of the root, stem and leaves are interconnected to form a continuous system of channels reaching
to all parts of the plant. Roots absorb water and minerals (in the form of ions) from the soil actively. This
creates a difference in the concentration of these ions between the root and the soil. Water, therefore, moves
into the root to eliminate this difference. Then, there is steady movement of water into root xylem. It creates
a column of water which is pushed upwards.
Q.5. How is food transported in plants ? [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-B)]
Ans. Food which is mainly synthesized by the green
leaves is transported to the stem and root through phloem
Venule to renal vein
tissue. The transportation in phloem is an active process which Afferent arteriole
Bowman’s capsule
utilises energy. Food like sucrose is transferred into phloem
Glomerulus
tissue using energy from ATP. This increases the osmotic Proximal Efferent
convoluted arteriole
pressure of the tissue causing water to move into it. Then this
tubule
food moves under concentration and pressure gradient to the
parts of the plant which need it.
Food from root or stem is transported to the buds for
their growth. Distal
convoluted
tubule
Questions on Article 6.5 (PAGE–112)
Q.1. Describe the structure and functioning of
nephrons. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-C), 2018 (Set-D)]
Ans. Nephrons are structural and functional unit of the
Network of
kidneys. capillaries Collecting duct
around tubule
(i) Structure of Nephron : Each nephron is having a
cup shaped structure known as Bowman’s capsule. This U-shaped loop
(Henle loop)
encloses a network of blood capillaries known as glomerulus.
The Bowman’s capsule leads into a convoluted tube (PCT)
forming a ‘U’ shaped tubular structure known as ‘Loop of Fig. 6.2 : Structure of a nephron
Henle’ which leads into distal convoluted tubule (DCT). The
DCT joints collecting duct.
(ii) Function of Nephron : The renal artery brings blood into the glomerulus in the Bowman’s capsule.
Life Processes 203

The blood is filtered. The filtrate contains lot of water, mineral ions (Na+, Cl–, K+), some sugar/glucose
and urea.
As the filtrate passes through PCT (Proximal) loop of Henle, DST. The useful substances are reabsorbed
back and excess of water, urea and other wastes are collected in the urinary bladder as urine.

Q.2. What are the methods used by plants to get rid of excretory products ?
Ans. Plants use completely different strategies for excretion from plants. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-A)]
(i) During day time CO2 produced by the plant is not a waste product as it is utilised in photosynthesis.
Excess of O2 produced by the plant during day time itself can be thought of as a waste product and is released
into the atmosphere.
(ii) During night O2 is not a waste product but CO2 is a waste product.
(iii) Even plants get rid of excess of water by process of transpiration.
(iv) Many plant waste products are stored in cellular vacuoles. The waste products may be stored in the
leaves which fall off.
(v) Waste products are also stored as gums and resins in old xylem.
(vi) Plants also excrete some waste substances into the soil around them.

Q.3. How is the amount of urine produced regulated ?

Ans. (i) During hot summer days, the body prespires a lot of water through general body surface (skin)
causing lot of loss of water. It necessiates to reduce the quantity of urine so as to conserve water in the body.
Therefore, different parts of the nephron viz, PCT, Loop of Henle, DCT reabsorb water and quantity of urine
is minimised.
(ii) During winter days when loss of water from the body surface is minimum and we drink lot of water,
it needs to be excreted to maintain proper composition of blood. The water from blood is not reabsorbed but
excreted in the form of kidney. It increases the quantity of urine.

Q.1. The kidneys in human beings are a part of the system for :
(a) nutrition (b) respiration
(c) excretion (d) transportation
Ans. (c) excretion.
Q.2. The xylem in plants are responsible for :
(a) transport of water (b) transport of food
(c) transport of amino acids (d) transport of oxygen
Ans. (a) transport of water
Q.3. The autotrophic mode of nutrition requires :
(a) carbon dioxide and water (b) chlorophyll
(c) sunlight (d) all of the above
Ans. (d) all of the above
204 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.4. The breakdown of pyruvate to give carbon dioxide, water and energy takes place in :
(a) cytoplasm (b) mitochondria
(c) chloroplast (d) nucleus.
Ans. (b) mitochondria.
Q.5. How are fats digested in our bodies ? Where does this process take place ? [2018 (Set-C)]
Ans. (a) Fats are digested by a group of enzymes known as lipases, which are present in pancreatic
juice (from pancreas) and intestinal secretions.
Emulsification of fats : It is brought about by bile which is a secretion of liver. The bile juice contains
lot of salts which break-up the large fat droplets into small droplets which provide large surface area to
lipases.
The emulsified fats are acted upon by lipases
Emulsified fats Fatty acids + Glycerol + Monoglycerides
The intestinal secretions containing lipases hydrolyse monoglycerides.
Monoglycerides Fatty acids + Glycerol.

(b) The digestion of fats takes place in the small intestine only.
Q.6. What is the role of saliva in the digestion of food ?
Ans. (a) Saliva is a watery fluid secreted in our buccal cavity from salivary glands. It contains a
carbohydrate digesting enzyme salivary amylase (Ptyalin). Ptyalin is most active at pH 6.8. It acts on starch
and converts it into double sugars maltose, isomaltose and limit dextrins.

Starch Maltose + Isomaltose + Limit dextrins

(b) Saliva plays no role in digestion of proteins and fats.

Q.7. What are the necessary conditions for autotrophic nutrition and what are its byproducts ?
Ans. Necessary conditions for autotropic nutrition are :
(i) Presence of chlorophyll, (ii) Presence of carbon dioxide, (iii) Presence of water, (iv) Presence of
photosynthetic enzymes, (v) Presence of sunlight.
The byproducts of photosynthesis are :
(i) Oxygen (O2), (ii) Chemical energy (ATPs).
Q.8. What are the differences between aerobic and anaerobic respiration ? Name some organisms
that use the anaerobic mode of respiration.
Ans. Differences between aerobic and anaerobic respiration are :
Aerobic Respiration Anaerobic Respiration
(i) O2 is used for oxidation of glucose. (i) O2 is not used.
(ii) 38 ATPs of energy are released on oxidation (ii) Just 2ATPs are synthesised from oxidation
of one molecule of glucose. of one molecule of glucose.
(iii) Its initial steps take place in cytoplasm but (iii) It takes place in cytoplasm only.
most of it occurs in mitochondria. (iv) The end products are CO2, ethanol or lactic
(iv) The end products are CO2, H2O and energy. acid and little energy is released.
Anaerobic mode of respiration takes place in yeasts, archaebacteria, some bacteria.
Life Processes 205

Q.9. How are the alveoli designed to maximise the exchange of gases ?
Ans. The alveoli are balloon shaped membranous structures present at the end of branchioles. They are
richly supplied with blood capillaries. Due to presence of alveoli, the surface area of each lung is nearly
80 m2. So, because of large surface area and rich supply of blood maximum exchange of gases takes place at
their surface.
Q.10. What would be the consequences of a deficiency of haemoglobin in our bodies ?
Ans. Deficiency of haemoglobin is known as anaemia and is characterised by the following
symptoms :
(i) As haemoglobin transports O2 to different parts of the body for oxidation of food, so if there is
deficiency of haemoglobin sufficient O2 will not be reaching to the cells and tissues and amount of energy
released will not be adequate.
(ii) The person will feel tired and exhausted all the time.
(iii) The skin and eye colour will become pale.
Q.11. Describe double circulation in human beings. Why is it necessary ?
Ans. Double circulation : The deoxygenated blood is collected into the right atrium by inferior and
superior vena cava. Then it passes down to right ventricle. When the right ventricle contracts, it goes to the
lungs. After oxygenation from the lungs it comes to left atrium and then to left ventricle. Oxygenated blood
from left ventricle is supplied to all other body parts.
So, the same blood passes through the heart twice, once as deoxygenated and other time as oxygenated,
this is known as double circulation.
Importance : Our heart is four chambered. It is because of it that only oxygenated blood is supplied to
all parts of the body. It helps in getting sufficient supply of oxygen.
Q.12. What are the differences between the transport of materials in xylem and phloem ?
Ans. (a) Transport of materials in xylem : Xylem transports only water and minerals absorbed by the
roots of the plant.
(b) Transport of materials through phloem : The phloem tissue transports sugar and other
photosynthetics and also the plant hormones.
Q.13. Compare the functioning of alveoli in the lungs and nephrons in the kidneys with respect to
their structure and functioning.
Ans. Comparison of Alveoli and Nephrons:
Alveoli in the lungs Nephrons in the kidneys

(i) Alveoli are the functional units of lungs. (i) Nephrons are structural and functional units
of kidneys.
(ii) Alveoli are well suited for exchange of (ii) They are well suited for filtration of blood
gases – CO2/O2 as they are richly supplied and maintenance of osmoregulation.
with blood.
(iii) O2 from air present in lungs diffuses into (iii) Nephrons reabsorb water and minerals,
the blood and CO2 from alveoli diffuses glucose which are of use to the body and
into the air present in the lungs. excrete urea as the waste product in urine.
(iv) The surface area of alveoli is very large (80 (iv) The surface area is not that much large.
m2/lung). There are of coursenearly10 lakhs nephrons
in each kindeys.
206 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

EXAMINATION BASED OTHER IMPORTANT QUESTIONS

I. Very Short-Answer Type Questions

A. Multiple Choice Questions
1. Mode of nutrition in green plants is :
(A) parasitic (B) heterotrophic
(C) autotrophic (D) saprophytic
Ans. (C) autotrophic
2. Mode of nutrition in most of the fungi is :
(A) saprophytic (B) parasitic
(C) autotrophic (D) holozoic
Ans. (A) saprophytic
3. Tigers and lions are :
(A) herbivorous (B) carnivorous
(C) omnivorous (D) frugivorous
Ans. (B) carnivorous
4. In cuscuta plant mode of nutrition is :
(A) insectivorous (B) autotrophic
(C) saprophytic (D) parasitic
Ans. (D) parasitic
5. The cockroaches are :
(A) herbivorous (B) carnivorous
(C) omnivorous (D) saprophytic
Ans. (B) carnivorous
6. Nutrition is holozoic in which of the organisms?
(A) Fungi (B) Bacteria
(C) Plants (D) Humans
Ans. (D) Humans
7. The small intestine is comparative shorter in :
(A) humans (B) cows
(C) lions (D) deer
Ans. (C) lion
8. Photosynthesis makes use of :
(A) chemical energy (B) thermal energy
(C) solar energy (D) wind energy
Ans. (C) solar energy
9. The byproduct of photosynthesis is :
(A) CO2 (B) H2O
(C) glucose (D) O2
Ans. (D) O2
Life Processes 207

10. Site of photosynthesis is :

(A) chloroplast (B) leucoplast
(C) chromoplast (D) amyloplast
Ans. (A) chloroplast
11. During light reaction there occur synthesis of :
(A) ATP (B) NADPH
(C) (A) and (B) both (D) ADP
Ans. (C) (A) and (B) both
12. Reducing power generated during light reaction is :
(A) ATP (B) ADP
(C) NADPH (D) ATP + NADPH
Ans. (D) ATP + NADPH
13. The reaction 2H2O  4H+ + 4e– + O2 takes place during :
(A) light phase of photosynthesis (B) dark phase of photosynthesis
(C) during electron transport (D) none of these
Ans. (A) light phase of photosynthesis
14. During photosynthesis, the primary acceptor of CO2 is :
(A) RUBISCO (B) RuBP
(C) H2O (D) none of these
Ans. (B) RuBP
15. In addition to C, H, O and N, the chlorophyll molecules contain :
(A) K (B) P
(C) Mg (D) Mn
Ans. (C) Mg
16. Rate of photosynthesis depends on which of the following factors ?
(A) Light (B) CO2
(C) Chlorophyll (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
17. Fixation of carbon dioxide means :
(A) respiration (B) photosynthesis
(C) nutrition (D) excretion
Ans. (B) photosynthesis
18. O2 is evolved during photosynthesis and is utilised during :
(A) respiration (B) nutrition
(C) excretion (D) photolysis of water
Ans. (A) respiration
19. In amoeba mode of nutrition is :
(A) holozoic (B) saprophytic
(C) parasitic (D) none of these
Ans. (A) holozoic
208 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

20. The process of digestion of food does not take place in :

(A) buccal cavity (B) stomach
(C) small intestine (D) oesophagus
Ans. (D) oesophagus
21. The process of digestion is completed in :
(A) oral cavity (B) stomach
(C) small intestine (D) large intestine
Ans. (C) small intestine
22. Digestion of proteins starts in :
(A) oral cavity (B) oesophagus
(C) stomach (D) small intestine
Ans. (C) stomach
23. Villi are mainly present in :
(A) small intestine (B) large intestine
(C) stomach (D) none of these
Ans. (A) small intestine
24. Absorption of digested food mainly takes place in :
(A) stomach (B) small intestine
(C) large intestine (D) rectum
Ans. (B) small intestine
25. HCl secreted along with gastric juice perform which of the following function ?
(A) Provide acidic medium (B) Kills microbes (bacteria)
(C) Softens the food (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
26. The largest (digestive) gland in the body is :
(A) pancreas (B) liver
(C) salivary glands (D) gastric glands
Ans. (B) liver
27. Which of the following is a heterocrine gland ?
(A) Liver (B) Pancreas
(C) Intestinal glands (D) Salivary glands
Ans. (B) Pancreas
28. Bile is secretion of :
(A) pancreas (B) salivary glands
(C) liver (D) gastric glands
Ans. (A) pancreas
29. Gastric juice contains :
(A) pepsin (B) trypsin
(C) amylase (D) none of these
Ans. (D) none of these
Life Processes 209

30. Ptyalin is present in :

(A) bile juice (B) pancreatic juice
(C) gastric juice (D) saliva
Ans. (D) saliva
31. In animals, the stored food is in the form of :
(A) glucose (B) glycogen
(C) starch (D) none of these
Ans. (B) glycogen
32. Enzyme present in bile juice is :
(A) protease (B) lipase
(C) amylase (D) no enzyme
Ans. (D) no enzyme
33. The net gain of ATPs from anaerobic respiration from 1 molecule of glucose is :
(A) 2 ATPs (B) 4 ATPs
(C) 36 ATPs (D) 38 ATPs
Ans. (A) 2 ATPs
34. The net gain of ATPs from complete oxidation of one molecule of glucose is :
(A) 38 ATPs (B) 36 ATPs
(C) 4 ATPs (D) 2 ATPs
Ans. (B) 36 ATPs
35. The products of respiration are :
(A) O2 and H2O + energy (B) CO2 and O2 + energy
(C) CO2 and H2O + energy (D) none of these
Ans. (C) CO2 and H2O + energy
36. Conversion/Breakdown of glucose into pyruvic acid takes place in :
(A) mitochondria (B) cytoplasm
(C) chloroplast (D) golgi bodies
Ans. (B) cytoplasm
37. Breakdown of pyruvate by using oxygen take place in :
(A) mitochondria (B) chloroplast
(C) cytoplasm (D) none of these
Ans. (A) mitochondria
38. The products of anaerobic respiration are :
(A) CO2 and H2O (B) pyruvate
(C) C2H5OH and CO2 (D) none of these
Ans. (C) C2H5OH and CO2
39. Energy currency of the cell is :
(A) AMP (B) ADP
(C) ATP (D) NADPH
Ans. (C) ATP
210 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

40. The respiratory pigment in human is :

(A) haemoglobin (B) haemocyanin
(C) haemolymph (D) plasma
Ans. (A) haemoglobin
41. In plants, water and minerals are transported through :
(A) phloem (B) xylem
(C) mesophyll (D) none of these
Ans. (B) xylem
42. In plants sugars, amino acids, etc., are transported through :
(A) xylem (B) phloem
(C) (A) and (B) both (D) none of these
Ans. (B) phloem
43. Xylem vessels only occur in :
(A) pteridophytes (B) gymnosperms
(C) angiosperms (D) none of these
Ans. (C) angiosperms
44. Blood is slightly alkaline in nature, its pH is :
(A) 6.8 (B) 7
(C) 7.4 (D) 8.8
Ans. (C) 7.4
45. Blood transports :
(A) only O2 (B) only CO2
(C) (A) and (B) both (D) none of these
Ans. (C) (A) and (B) both
46. The function of the platelets is :
(A) transportation of O2/CO2 (B) to defend the body
(C) blood clotting at injured site (D) none of these
Ans. (C) blood clotting at injured site
47. Which of the following play important role in blood clotting ?
(A) Cl– (B) Na+
(C) K+ (D) Ca++
Ans. (D) Ca ++

48. Which of the following carry deoxygenated blood ?

(A) Pulmonary vein (B) Pulmonary artery
(C) Aorta (D) Renal artery
Ans. (B) Pulmonary artery
49. Lymphocytes are present in :
(A) lymph (B) blood
(C) (A) and (B) both (D) none of these
Ans. (C) (A) and (B) both
Life Processes 211

50. Normal blood pressure of a person is :

(A) mm Hg (B) mm Hg

(C) mm Hg (D) mm Hg

Ans. (B) mm Hg

51. The normal haemoglobin range of an adult man is :

(A) 9-12 mg/100 mL of blood (B) 13-14 mg/100 mL of blood
(C) 10-11 mg/100 mL of blood (D) 9-14 mg/100 mL of blood
Ans. (B) 13-14 mg/100 mL of blood
52. The largest artery of human body is :
(A) pulmonary artery (B) renal artery
(C) vena cava (D) aorta
Ans. (D) aorta
53. The instrument used to measure blood pressure is :
(A) sphygmomanometer (B) stathoscope
(C) ECG (D) EEG
Ans. (A) sphygmomanometer
54. The main excretory product in humans is :
(A) urea (B) ammonia
(C) uric acid (D) amino acids
Ans. (A) urea
55. The main function of the kidneys is/are :
(A) excretion of urea (B) reabsorption of minerals glucose
(C) osmoregulation (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
56. In humans the structural and functional unit of kidneys is :
(A) protonephridia (B) nephron
(C) nephridia (D) none of these
Ans. (B) nephron
57. The nephridia/kidneys reabsorb :
(A) Na+ ions (B) amino acids
(C) glucose (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
58. The waste product(s) in plants are :
(A) CO2 during night (B) gums
(C) resins (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
212 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

59. Which of the following is an autotroph ?

(A) Mango tree (B) Man
(C) Cuscuta (D) Cat
Ans. (A) Mango tree
60. Mode of nutrition in plasmodium is :
(A) parasitic (B) saprophytic
(C) autotrophic (D) holozoic
Ans. (A) parasitic
61. The autotrophic mode of nutrition requires :
(A) CO2 and H2O (B) chlorophyll
(C) sunlight (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
62. Which simple food is prepared first in the process of photosynthesis ?
(A) Fructose (B) Glucose
(C) Sucrose (D) Starch
Ans. (B) Glucose
63. In what form food is stored in the plants ?
(A) Glucose (B) Glycogen
(C) Starch (D) Cellulose
Ans. (C) Starch
64. Plants need nitrogen for :
(A) synthesis of amino acids and proteins (B) synthesis of DNA/RNA
(C) synthesis of ATP (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
65. The green pigment presents in the leaves of a plant is :
(A) chlorophyll (B) xanthophyll
(C) carotene (D) phycocyanin
Ans. (A) chlorophyll
66. The breakdown of pyruvate to CO2, H2O and energy takes place in :
(A) nucleus (B) mitochondria
(C) cytoplasm (D) golgi bodies
Ans. (B) mitochondria
67. In humans the exchange of gases takes place in :
(A) trachea (B) bronchi
(C) bronchioles (D) alveoli
Ans. (D) alveoli
68. The pulmonary arteries take the blood from the heart to the :
(A) kidneys (B) lungs
(C) liver (D) intestine
Ans. (B) lungs
Life Processes 213

69. A blood vessel which carries blood back to the heart is :

(A) artery (B) aorta
(C) vein (D) capillary
Ans. (C) vein
70. Which of the following is essential for synthesis of ATP ?
(A) Ca (B) K
(C) P (D) Na
Ans. (C) P
71. Light energy absorbed by chlorophyll initiate photosynthesis by :
(A) reducing CO2 to glucose (B) synthesizing glucose
(C) energising chlorophyll (D) photolysis of water
Ans. (D) photolysis of water
72. Which of the following will not be a limiting factor for photosynthesis ?
(A) CO2 (B) O2
(C) Light (D) Chlorophyll
Ans. (B) O2
73. During photosynthesis, what is the source of O2 released by the plants ?
(A) H2O (B) CO2
(C) Glucose (C6H12O6) (D) none of these
Ans. (A) H2O
74. Oxygen in glucose (C6H12O6) comes from :
(A) H2O (B) CO2
(C) O2 from air (D) both (A) and (B)
Ans. (B) CO2
75. In photosynthesis, light energy is converted into :
(A) thermal energy (B) chemical energy
(C) mechanical energy (D) potential energy
Ans. (B) chemical energy
76. The absorption (intake) of mineral ions by roots of plants at the expense of energy is called :
(A) active absorption (B) passive absorption
(C) diffusion (D) osmosis
Ans. (A) active absorption
77. The main function of bile is :
(A) emulsification of fats (B) digestion of carbohydrates
(C) digestion of proteins (D) none of these
Ans. (A) emulsification of fats
78. Which of the following prevents collasping of trachea ?
(A) Ribs (B) Bones
(C) Cartilaginous rings (D) Muscles
Ans. (C) Cartilaginous rings
214 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

79. The formation of urea takes place in :

(A) kidneys (B) muscles
(C) heart (D) liver
Ans. (D) liver
80. Valves to control the direction of flow are present in :
(A) arteries (B) veins
(C) capillaries (D) none of these
Ans. (B) veins
81. For reaching left side of the heart, blood must pass through :
(A) lungs (B) kidneys
(C) liver (D) intestine
Ans. (A) lungs
82. The bacteria are :
(A) parasites (B) saprophytes
(C) autotrophs (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
83. The chief characteristic of life is :
(A) nutrition (B) growth
(C) movement (D) molecular movement
Ans. (D) molecular movement
84. The process of oxidation of food (glucose) in the cells is known as :
(A) nutrition (B) respiration
(C) circulation (D) excretion
Ans. (B) respiration
85. The energy released during respiration is stored in the form of :
(A) ATP (B) ADP
(C) P (D) AMP
Ans. (A) ATP
86. Complete oxidation of one glucose molecule yields :
(A) 2 ATPs (B) 4 ATPs
(C) 36 ATPs (D) 38 ATPs
Ans. (D) 38 ATPs
87. Which of the following enzyme act in acidic medium ?
(A) Pepsin (B) Trypsin
(C) Amylase (D) Lipase
Ans. (A) Pepsin
88. With which of the following haemoglobin is associated ?
(A) WBCs (B) RBCs
(C) Platelets (D) Lymph
Ans. (B) RBCs
Life Processes 215

89. Heart beat of a normal healthy person at rest is (per minute) :

(A) 60 (B) 72
(C) 80 (D) 92
Ans. (B) 72
90. Bowman’s capsules are associated with :
(A) liver (B) brain
(C) kidneys (D) heart
Ans. (C) kidneys
91. The pumping organ in the body is :
(A) heart (B) lungs
(C) kidneys (D) liver
Ans. (A) heart
92. Pulmonary veins carry :
(A) oxygenated blood (B) deoxygenated blood
(C) mixed blood (D) none of these
Ans. (A) oxygenated blood

B. One Word/Sentence Questions

Q.1. Why are molecular movements needed for life ?
Ans. Molecular movements are needed for maintenance of life.
Q.2. Viruses are truely alive or not ?
Ans. Viruses are truely not alive.
Q.3. What are life processes ?
Ans. The biochemical processes which maintain life, are called life processes.
Q.4. Which process supplies oxygen to the body from outside ?
Ans. Respiration/Breathing.
Q.5. Single-celled organisms do not require organs for life processes. Why ?
Ans. Because, in them the whole surface of the organism (cell) is in direct contact with the environment
for exchange of energy and matter.
Q.6. Why do large multicellular organisms need organs and organ systems ?
Ans. Because, in them most of the cells are not in direct contact with the environment but are deep
seated, direct exchange is not possible.
Q.7. Why does the body need energy ?
Ans. The body needs energy for maintaining life processes (life).
Q.8. What is meant by autotrophic nutrition ?
Ans. Nutrition which involves synthesis of organic food by an organism (green plants) with the help of
inorganic substances by process of photosynthesis.
Q.9. In what form energy is store in plants ?
Ans. Plants store energy in the form of starch.
Q.10. In what form do animals store energy ?
Ans. Animals store energy in the form of glycogen.
216 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.11. What is photosynthesis ?

Ans. The conversion of solar energy into chemical energy by green plants is called photosynthesis.
Q.12. Give over all equation of photosynthesis.
Ans. 6CO2 + 6H2O + 6O2

Q.13. What are stomata ?

Ans. Small specialised pores present on the surface of leaves meant for exchange of gases and
transpiration, are called stomata.
Q.14. What is meant by biological nitrogen fixation ?
Ans. Conversion of free nitrogen of air into nitrogen compounds by microbes (Bacteria, BGA) is called
biological nitrogen fixation.
Q.15. What is meant by heterotrophic nutrition ?
Ans. Nutrition mode in which an organism is not able to synthesize its own food but depend on
others plants or animals for their food, is called heterotrophic mode of nutrition.
Q.16. What is the mode of nutrition in fungi ?
Ans. In fungi, mode of nutrition is saprophytic.
Q.17. What is meant by saprophytic mode of nutrition ?
Ans. Nutrition in which organism draw nourishment from dead organic matter by digesting it outside
their body and then absorbing the soluble nutrients.
Q.18. What are different types of heterotrophic mode of nutrition ?
Ans. (i) Saprophytic, (ii) Parasitic, (iii) Holozoic.
Q.19. What is meant by parasitic mode of nutrition ?
Ans. Type of nutrition in which an organism draw nourishment by living in/on the body of other organisms
(Host) and cause harm to that.
Q.20. What are parasites ?
Ans. An organism that lives in/on the body of other organisms and draw nourishment by causing harm
to it, is called a parasite.
Q.21. Name one plant parasite.
Ans. Cuscuta is a plant parasite.
Q.22. What are food vacuoles ?
Ans. Vacuoles containing food stuffs, are called food vacuoles.
Q.23. How does nutrition take place in amoeba ?
Ans. It takes place by phagocytosis.
Q.24. What is meant by phagocytosis ?
Ans. The process in which a cell engulfs solid food material, i.e., it is cell eating.
Q.25. Which enzyme does, the saliva contain ?
Ans. The saliva contains salivary amylase (tyalin).
Q.26. What is meant by peristaltic movements ?
Ans. The slow movement of a ball of food (bolus) in the intestine (alimentary canal) is called peristaltic
movement.
Q.27. Which glands are present in the walls of stomach ?
Ans. Gastric glands.
Life Processes 217

Q.28. Which acid is secreted in stomach ?

Ans. Hydrochloric acid.
Q.29. Name two protein digesting enzymes ?
Ans. Pepsin and trypsin.
Q.30. What is the function of mucous in gastric juice ?
Ans. To make the food slimy for smooth passage through alimentary canal.
Q.31. What is meant by acidity ?
Ans. Excessive secretion of hydrochloric acid in stomach leading to irritation and pain.
Q.32. Tigers have a shorter small intestine. Why ?
Ans. Tigers are carnivorous animals which eat flesh. Flesh is digested easily as compared to cellulose/
grass.
Q.33. Name the largest gland of the body.
Ans. Liver is largest gland of the body.
Q.34. What is bile juice ?
Ans. Bile juice is the secretion of liver which contains lot of salts.
Q.35. What is pancreas ?
Ans. Pancreas is a heterocrine (mix) gland present in the fold of intestine which secrete digestive juice
containing large number of enzymes.
Q.36. What is the advantage of presence of villi in intestine ?
Ans. The villi increases the absorptive area of intestine.
Q.37. Name the gas used and the gas produced in photosynthesis.
Ans. Gas used is CO2 and the gas produced is O2.
Q.38. What is the site of photosynthesis in green plants ?
Ans. Chloroplast.
Q.39. Name two factors affecting photosynthesis.
Ans. (i) Light, (ii) CO2.
Q.40. What are enzymes ?
Ans. Enzymes are proteins which act as bio-catalysts. They catalyse life processes.
Q.41. What is the role of chlorophyll in photosynthesis ?
Ans. Chlorophyll traps light energy which is used in fixation of CO2 to form carbohydrates.
Q.42. Name the factor on which opening of stomata depend.
Ans. It depends on osmotic pressure of guard cells. When guard cells are fully turgid, stomata open.
Q.43. Name the group of plants in which stomata open during night.
Ans. Cacti (Xerophytic plant) – Opuntia.
Q.44. Why is nitrogen essential for plants ?
Ans. Nitrogen is essential for synthesis of amino acids, proteins, nucleic acids, chlorophyll etc.
Q.45. What are the steps of nutrition in animals ?
Ans. Ingestion, digestion, assimilation and egestion.
Q.46. How does nutrition take place in paramecium ?
Ans. Food is moved to a specific spot by the movement of cilia which cover the entire surface of
the cell.
218 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.47. What is gastric juice ?

Ans. The secretion of gastric glands present in walls of stomach which contain pepsinogen, HCl and
mucous.
Q.48. Define the term—respiration.
Ans. Respiration may be defined as oxidation of food (glucose) into CO2 and water in the cells by
enzymes to release energy in the form of ATPs.
Q.49. What is meant by fermentation ?
Ans. The conversion of organic substance like sugars into ethanol and CO2 by microbes/enzymes under
anaerobic conditions, is called fermentation.
Q.50. Name the products of fermentation.
Ans. The products of fermentation are ethyl alcohol and carbon dioxide.
Q.51. Where does aerobic respiration take place in the cell ?
Ans. In mitochondria.
Q.52. What is glycolysis ?
Ans. Conversion of glucose into pyruvate in the cytoplasm is called glycolysis.
Q.53. Where does glycolysis take place in the cell ?
Ans. Glycolysis takes place in cytoplasm of the cell.
Q.54. Expand ATP.
Ans. Adenosine triphosphate.
Q.55. Under anaerobic conditions pyruvate is converted into which compounds in muscles ?
Ans. Lactic acid.
Q.56. Name the energy currency of the cell.
Ans. ATP (Adenosine triphosphate) is the energy currency of the cell.
Q.57. Which of the respiration pathways release more energy ?
Ans. Complete oxidation of glucose into CO2 and H2O in mitochondria releases maximum energy.
Q.58. Which form of oxygen is used by aquatic plants ?
Ans. Oxygen dissolved in water is used by aquatic plants and aquatic animals.
Q.59. Why is the rate of breathing faster in aquatic animals ?
Ans. Because the quantity of O2 dissolved in water is low so as to get sufficient supply of oxygen.
Q.60. Why does the throat not collapse ?
Ans. Because, it is guarded by cartilaginous rings.
Q.61. What are alveoli ?
Ans. They are balloon like sacs present at the end of bronchioles, and are the main site of gaseous
exchange.
Q.62. Name the respiratory pigment in humans.
Ans. Haemoglobin is respiratory pigment in humans.
Q.63. Define the term—residual volume.
Ans. The quantity of oxygen which still remain in the lungs even after normal exhalation, is termed as residual
volume.
Q.64. Define breathing.
Ans. Breathing may be defined as mechanical process which involves inhalation and exhalation.
Life Processes 219

Q.65. In which form energy released during respiration is stored ?

Ans. It is stored in the form of ATP.
Q.66. Through what does the exchange of gases take place in plants ?
Ans. Through stomata and lenticels (pores in stem).
Q.67. By which process, the exchange of O2 and CO2 in plants takes place ?
Ans. By diffusion.
Q.68. Name the organ of respiration in insects and fishes.
Ans. Insects – Trachea Fishes – Gills
Q.69. Name the organ of respiration in earthworm, birds, mammals, reptiles.
Ans. Earthworm – skin.
Birds, mammals, reptiles – lungs.
Q.70. How much is the surface area of each alveoli of each lung ?
Ans. Around 80 m2.
Q.71. What is blood ?
Ans. Blood is a fluid connective tissue of red colour which functions as transportation medium for
many substances.
Q.72. What is the name given to fluid part of the blood ?
Ans. Blood plasma.
Q.73. What is heart ?
Ans. Heart is a muscular pumping organ, which pumps the blood to different parts of the body.
Q.74. Why do ventricles have thicker walls as compared to the atria ?
Ans. Because they have to pump blood to distant parts of the body.
Q.75. How is the back flow of blood from ventricles to atriaprevented ?
Ans. It is prevented due to presence of atrioventricular valves.
Q.76. How is separation of oxygenated and deoxygenated blood helpful ?
Ans. It helps in adequate supply of oxygen (O2) to different parts of body especially brain.
Q.77. What is meant by double circulation ?
Ans. When the same blood passes through the heart twice once as deoxygenated and then as oxygenated,
is called double circulation.
Q.78. What is meant by blood pressure ?
Ans. The pressure exerted by blood on the walls of blood vessels, is called blood pressure.
Q.79. What is the normal blood pressure ?

Ans. mm Hg.

Q.80. Name the instrument used to measure blood pressure ?

Ans. Sphygmomanometer.
Q.81. Define hypertension.
Ans. The problem of high blood pressure is called hypertension.
Q.82. The veins are of thin walls, why ?
Ans. Because in them the blood does not flow with pressure.
220 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.83. Why does the blood in arteries flow only in one direction ?
Ans. The arteries carry blood pumped by the heart, so the pressure is only in one direction.
Q.84. What are blood capillaries ?
Ans. Very fine blood vessels with single cell thick walls are called blood capillaries.
Q.85. What is the function of blood platelets ?
Ans. Blood platelets help in clotting of blood at the injured portion of the body.
Q.86. Name the plant organ which absorb water and minerals, from the soil.
Ans. Plant roots.
Q.87. Name the plant tissue associated with water and mineral transportation.
Ans. Xylem.
Q.88. Name the tissue associated with translocation of food (Products of photosynthesis).
Ans. Phloem.
Q.89. Define the term—translocation.
Ans. Translocation may be defined as movement of substances especially products of photosynthesis
through phloem tissue.
Q.90. Name two types of xylem elements through which water moves upwards.
Ans. Xylem tracheids and xylem vessels.
Q.91. Define transpiration.
Ans. The loss of water from plant surface in the form of vapours, through stomata, cuticle or lenticels,
is called transpiration.
Q.92. What is the other term for extracellular fluid ?
Ans. Lymph.
Q.93. What is the function of lymphocytes ?
Ans. Lymphocytes protect the body from infections.
Q.94. What type of blood is present in the left side of the heart ?
Ans. Left side of the heart contains oxygenated blood.
Q.95. Name the type of blood vessel which carries deoxygenated blood towards the heart.
Ans. Vena cava.
Q.96. What is meant by systole and diastole ?
Ans. The contraction phase of heart chambers is called systole and relaxation phase of heart chambers
is called diastole.
Q.97. Name the process by which water is lost in plants.
Ans. Transpiration.
Q.98. What is meant by excretion ?
Ans. The process of removal of waste is called excretion.
Q.99. Name two nitrogenous waste products.
Ans. Urea and uric acid.
Q.100. What are nephrons ?
Ans. The structural and functional unit of kidneys, is called nephron.
Q.101. How much is the initial filtrate of each kidney per day ?
Ans. Approximately 180 letre/day.
Life Processes 221

Q.102. Define hemodialysis.

Ans. The process of filtration of blood by artificial kidneys to remove nitrogenous waste is called
hemodialysis.
Q.103. What is meant by dialysis ?
Ans. The process of separation of large sized molecules like proteins from small molecules/ions by
filtration is called dialysis.
Q.104. Name two waste products in plants.
Ans. Resins, gums.
Q.105. Define osmoregulation.
Ans. The process of adequate maintenance of water and minerals in the body, is called osmoregulation.
Q.106. What is Bowman’s capsule ?
Ans. A cup shaped structure present in the nephron is called Bowman’s capsule.
Q.107. What is glomerulus ?
Ans. A network of blood capillaries present in Bowman’s capsule.
Q.108. Where does the formation of urea take place in the body ?
Ans. In the liver due to conversion of ammonia into urea.
Q.109. Why do the heart have different chambers ?
Ans. So, as to prevent mixing of oxygenated and deoxygenated blood.

II. Short-Answer Type Questions

Q.1. How can we differentiate a living thing from a non-living thing ?
Ans. On the basis of following observations we can differentiate a living thing from a non-living
object :
Movements : (i) Living things move. Movement is the most important sign of being alive.
(ii) Living things grow in mass, size.
(iii) Living things respond to changes in the environment.
(iv) Living things need energy/food. They respire for releasing energy.
Q.2. Why moleculer movements are essential for life?
Ans. All the structures in organisms are made of association of molecules. Hence, there is a need of
body maintenance and protection. so, the organisms highly need to continue the molecular movements otherwise
the organism will servive so long.
Q.3. Enlist the molecules which make a living body or structure.
Ans. The molecules which make a living body or structure are :
(i) Different types of carbohydrates (ii) Different types of proteins
(iii) Different types of fats (iv) Different types of nucleic acids
(v) Different types of minerals (vi) Different types of water, etc.
Q.4. Why do large multicellular organisms need organs and organ systems ?
Ans. Multicellular organisms are composed of crores of different types of cells. The structure is quite
complex. As each cell requires :
(i) nourishment (food) , (ii) energy, (iii) need to excrete waste products, (iv) oxygen, (v) hormones, etc.
All these requirements can be fulfilled if there are organs and organ systems.
222 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.5. Enlist various processes needed for maintenance of life.

Ans. Various processes needed for maintenance of life are :
(i) Nutrition
(ii) Transportation/circulation
(iii) Excretion
(iv) Respiration
(v) Reproduction, etc.
Q.6. What are autotrophic nutrition and heterophic nutrition ?
Ans. Autotrophic nutrion : The nutrition process in which the green plants produce compounds from
inorganic substances.
Heterotrophic nutrition : The nutrition process in which the organism does not form the food itself but
depends on other organisms, is called heterotrophic nutrition. Often all the animals are heterotrophic.
Q.7. Draw labelled diagram of stomata.
Ans. Labelled diagram of stomata

Guard Cells

Stomatal Pore (Open)

Chloroplast

Fig. 6.3 : Stomata

Q.8. How do stomata open and close ? [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-C)]

Ans. The opening and closing of stomata is a function of guard cells. When the osmotic pressure in the
guard cells increase due to accumulation of ions from surrounding cells, then water flows into them. The
guard cells swell and the stomatal pore open.

Guard Cells

Stomatal Pore Stomatal Pore (Close)

(Open)

Chloroplast
(a) (b)

Fig. 6.4 : (a) Open and (b) closed stomatal pore

Life Processes 223

When there is flow of ions out of the guard cells, the osmotic pressure decreases, the guard cells shrink
and the stomatal pore get closed.

Q.9. Draw labelled diagram of chloroplast.

Ans. Labelled diagram of chloroplast :

Outer Inner Double

membrane membrane layered
Osmiophilic membrane One thylakoid
droplet
Ribosomes (Small
70 S type)
Stroma

A granum (Thylakoids stacked Strach grain

together to form a granum containing Stroma lamellae (Stores photosyn-
photosynthetic pigments) (intergranum) thetic products) Chloroplast DNA
Fig. 6.5 : Chloroplast

Q.10. Name four elements needed by plants in large quantity.

Ans. Following are the macro-elements needed by plants in large quantity :
(i) Nitrogen (N),
(ii) Phosphorus (P),
(iii) Potassium (K),
(iv) Carbon (C),
(v) Hydrogen (H),
(vi) Oxygen (O).
Q.11. Why is nitrogen (N) essential for plants ?
Ans. Nitrogen is a macro-elements needed by the plants in huge quantity, because it is needed for the
following :
(i) For synthesis of amino acids, proteins and enzymes.
(ii) For synthesis of chlorophyll.
(iii) For synthesis of nucleic acids – DNA and RNA.
(iv) For synthesis of ATP, NADP, etc.
224 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.12. Draw labelled diagram of cross-section of a leaf. [H.B.S.E. 2018 (Set-B), Sample Paper 2019]
Ans. Diagram C.S. leaf.

Midrib Lamina or leaf blade

Vein

Phloem Xylem
Vascular bundle Waxy cuticle

Upper epidermis

Chloroplast

Air spaces

Guard cell

} Lower epidermis

Fig. 6.6 : Cross-section of a leaf

Q.13. Describe briefly different events of photosynthesis.

[H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-C), 2019 (Set-D), Sample Paper 2019]
Ans. Photosynthesis : It is the process by which the green plants and certain bacteria convert solar
energy into chemical energy or they fix atmospheric carbon dioxide into sugar (carbohydrates).
The over all reaction of photosynthesis can be written as :
6CO2 + 6H2O C6H12O6 + 6O2
Carbon dioxide Water Glucose Oxygen
The events which occur during this process are :
(i) Absorption of light energy by chlorophyll.
(ii) Splitting of water molecule
2H2O  4H+ + 4e– + O2
(iii) Conversion of light energy into chemical energy.
(iv) Reduction of carbon dioxide to carbohydrates.
Q.14. What are different modes of nutrition in fungi ?
Ans. As fungi lack chlorophyll, cannot synthesize their food, they show following modes of nutrition :
(a) Saprophytic : Most of the fungi are saprophytic, i.e., they grow on dead organic matter. They
decompose the dead organic matter and absorb soluble nutrients, e.g., Agaricus (Mushrooms), yeasts.
(b) Parasitic : A number of fungi cause diseases in plants and animals and draw nourishment from
them. e.g., Ustilago on wheat.
Life Processes 225

(c) Symbiotic : Some fungi live with algae to form lichens. They absorb water and minerals for algae
and in turn get nourishment.
Q.15. Give four examples of parasites.
Ans. Parasitic mode of nutrition : Some organisms derive nutrition from plants and animals without
killing them, this is known as parasitic mode of nutrition. Examples of parasites are :
(i) Cuscuta (amar-bel), (ii) Orchids, (iii) Ticks, (iv) Lice, (v) Leeches, (vi) Tape-worms.
Q.16. How does nutrition take place in amoeba ? [H.B.S.E. 2017, 2019 (Set-D)]
Ans. In amoeba nutrition takes place by phagocytosis— cell eating. Amoeba takes in food using temporary
finger like extensions of the cell surface which fuse over the food particle forming a food vacuole. Inside the
food-vacuole complex substances are broken down into simpler ones which then diffuse into the cytoplasm.
The remaining undigested material is removed to the surface of the cell and is thrown out.

Food Vacuole Waste

Pseudopodia Food Particle Ingestion
Fusion of Food
Vacuole with
Lysosome

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Digestion of Food

Fig. 6.7 : Nutrition in Amoeba

Q.17. How does nutrition take place in paramecium ?

Ans. Paramecium is an unicellular organism. The cell has a definite shape and food is taken in at a
specific spot.
Food is moved to this spot by the movement of cilia which cover the entire surface of the cell.

Cytostome Buccal cavity

Oral group

Food vacuole Water current with

forming food particles

Fig. 6.8 : Paramecium receiving food particles

Q.18. What is the function of saliva ?

Ans. Saliva is a watery fluid which is secreted in buccal cavity (mouth) by three pairs of salivary gland.
pH of saliva is 6.8.
(i) Saliva makes the food slimy due to addition of mucin, an organic compound.
(ii) Salivary amylase (tyalin) enzyme bring about splitting of starch into maltose, isomaltose and limit
dextrins.
226 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.19. Describe various strategies of heterotrophic nutrition. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-A), 2018 (Set-D)]
Ans. Heterotrophic Nutrition are :
1. Saprophytic Nutrition : The nutrition in which organism draw nourishment from dead organic matter
by digesting it outside their body and then absorbing the soluble nutrients. Examples : Fungi, bisects etc.

2. Parasitic Nutrition : This type of nutrition in which an organism draw nourishment by living in/on
the body of other organisms (Host) and cause harm to that. Examples : cuscuta, plasmodium etc.

3. Holozoic Nutrition : Holozoic nutrition takes place in those organisms which take solid or liquid
food through the mouth inside their body. Examples of organisms having holozoic mode of nutrition are
human beings, cat, fish etc. It is mainly of three types.

(a) Herbivores : The oganisms which eat the plants and their products only, are called herbivores.
Examples : Deer, cow, rabbit, grasshopper, etc.

(b) Carnivores : The organisms which eat other organisms or their flesh are called carnivores. Examples :
Tigers, lions, frogs etc.

(c) Omnivores : The organisms which can eat plants and their products, animals and their meat, etc. are
called omnivores. Examples : Cockroaches, cats, dogs, humans, etc.
Q.20. Briefly describe the composition of bile juice.
Ans. Bile juice is the secretion of liver. It is alkaline with pH of 8.0. It is yellowish green juice which has
no enzyme. It is formed of :

(i) water (86%)

(ii) bile pigments – biliverdin (green), bilirubin (yellow),

(iii) bile salts – sodium bicarbonate sodium glycolate, sodium taurocholate

The bile salts emulsify the fats in small intestine.

Q.21. Name the products of digestion of carbohydrates, fats, proteins and nucleic acids.
Ans. The end products of digestion of different substances are :

Carbohydrates – Glucose

Fats – Fatty acids, glycerol

Proteins – Amino acids

Nucleic acids – Nucleotides, nucleosides.

Life Processes 227

Q.22. What are dental caries ? Enlist its harmful effects.

Ans. Tooth decay is known as dental caries. It begins when bacteria acting on sugars produce
acids which soften and demineralise the enamel and dental plaque is formed. It causes following harmful
effects :
(i) It causes gradual softening of enamel and dentine.
(ii) It causes infection of gums causing inflammation.
Q.23. What is meant by anaerobic respiration ? Where does it take place in the cell ? What can be
its products ?
Ans. Anaerobic respiration : (a) The process of breakdown of glucose to release energy in the absence
of oxygen, is called anaerobic respiration.
(b)It takes place in the cytoplasm of the cell.
(c) Its products are ethanol or lactic acid and CO2
C6H12O6  2C2H5OH + 2CO2 + 2l Kcal (Energy)

Q.24. Why are cramps (in muscles) caused sometimes ?

Ans. When do vigorous exercise or physical work, then our body needs lot of energy. To release large
quantity of energy body needs quick supply of oxygen for oxidation of food. But due to quick physical work,
the supply of O2 is insufficient. As a result pyruvate get changed into lactic acid which temporarily get stored
in our muscles and cause cramps.

Glucose Pyruvate

Pyruvate Lactic acid

Q.25. Comment upon the importance of ATP molecules in the cells.

Ans. (i) Adenosine triphosphate (ATP) is the energy currency for most cellular processes. The energy
released during the process of respiration is used to synthesize ATP molecules from ADP and inorganic
phosphate.
ADP + P ATP
(ii) Endothermic processes in the cell use ATP to derive the reactions.
(iii) ATP is used in the cell for
— contraction of muscles
— protein synthesis
— conduction of nerve impulse
— to maintain life processes.

Q.26. Describe the process of respiration in brief.

Ans. In all organisms protists, algae, fungi, plants, animals and men, the process of respiration is same.
The raw materials for respiration are glucose and oxygen. Broadly, the process of respiration is completed
in two steps :
(a) Glycolysis : Glucose is converted into pyruvate in cytoplasm of the cells. The process does not
require O2. Each glucose (C6) molecule is broken into two pyruvate (C3) molecules.
228 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

(b) Kreb’s cycle : The pyruvate molecules then enter into mitochondria. The pyruvate molecules are
completely oxidised into carbon dioxide and water and lot of energy is released. This energy is utilised for
synthesis of ATP. From complete oxidation of one molecule of glucose 38 ATPs are synthesized.
The overall reaction of respiration can be written as :
C6H12O6 + 6O2  6CO2 + 6H2O + Energy
Glucose Pyruvate + Energy CO2 + H2O + Energy
Q.27. Describe the organs of respiration in humans. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-B), 2018 (Set-C)]
Ans. The organs of respiration in humans are a pair of lungs located in thoracis cavity. The lungs are
balloon like flexible and spongy structures which are richly supplied with blood for quick exchange of gases.
In addition to lungs the respiratory system comprises of nostrils, nasal cavity, trachea bronchi (and of
course lungs). The bronchi are divided into bronchioles which terminate into balloons/grapes like structures
called alveoli. The breathing divide in two parts :

Fig. 6.9 :

Q.28. Describe the process of breathing in brief. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-B)]

Ans. In human beings, the air taken into the body through nostrils. It is filtered and moistened there.
Then it passes through nasal cavity and enter into the trachea. The trachea (throat) is supported by cartilaginous
rings. Within the lungs this passage divides into two bronchi. These divide and redivide to form balloon like
structures called alveoli the breathing divide in two parts :
(a) Inhalation : When we breathe in, we lift our ribs and flatten our diaphragm. As a result, the chest
cavity becomes larger. Due to this air is sucked into the lungs and fills the expanded alveoli, where exchange
of gases takes place. CO2 from the blood diffuses into the cavity of the lungs and O2 diffuses into the blood.
(b) Exhalation : When we breathe out, our ribs come to their normal (unextended) form, our diaphragm
become convex and pushes the lungs there by the air moves out of the lungs. During normal breathing cycle,
some air always remains into the lungs (residual volume). It provides sufficient time for oxygen to be absorbed.
Life Processes 229

Q.29. Enlist main functions of the blood.

Ans. Main functions of the blood are :
(i) It transports O2 and CO2.
(ii) It transports nutrients – glucose, aminoacids.
(iii) It transports hormones to the target organs.
(iv) It maintains body temperature.
Q.30. Draw labelled diagram of internal structure of human heart. [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-A)]
Ans.

Right pulmonary
Superior Left
Aorta
Left

Left
Right

Inferior Left ventricle

Right

Vena cava from lower Septum

Fig. 6.10 : Cross-section of human heart showing internal structure

Q.31. Match the column I and column II.

Column I Column II
(a) Fishes (i) 3 Chambered Heart
(b) Amphibians (ii) 4 Chambered Heart
(c) Reptiles (iii) 2 Chambered Heart
(d) Birds/Mammals (iv) Partially 4 Chambered Heart
Ans. (a) Fishes (iii) 2 Chambered Heart, (b) Amphibians (i) 3 Chambered Heart,
(c) Reptiles (iv) Partially 4 Chambered Heart, (d) Birds/Mammals (ii) 4 Chambered Heart.
Q.32. Differentiate between systolic and diastolic blood pressure.
Ans. The following are differentiate between systolic and diastolic blood pressure :
Systolic BP Diastolic BP
(i) The pressure exerted on the walls of blood (i) The pressure exerted on the walls of the
vessels when the ventricles (heart) contract. blood vessels when the ventricles (heart)
relax.
(ii) It is 120 mm Hg. (ii) It is 80 mm Hg.
(iii) It is high. (iii) It is low.
230 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.33. Differentiate between arteries and veins. [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-A)]
Ans. Following are the differences between arteries and veins :

Arteries Veins
(i) The blood vessels which carry blood from (i) The blood vessels which collect and bring
the heart to different parts of the body. blood to the heart.
(ii) They generally carry oxygenated blood. (ii) They generally carry deoxygenated blood.
(iii) In them blood flows with pressure. (iii) In them blood does not flow with pressure.
(iv) Their walls are thick, muscular and elastic. (iv) Their walls are thin and not much elastic.
Q.34. What is lymph ? Describe its functions. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-D)]
Ans. Lymph is a fluid connective tissue present in
interstitial spaces. It is also known as interstitial fluid. It contains
plasma, some proteins and blood cells called lymphocytes. It is
colourless fluid with very less proteins.
Functions :
(i) Lymph carries digested and absorbed fat from
intestine into blood.
(ii) It drains excess fluid from extracellular space back
into the blood.
(iii) The lymphocytes protect the body against infections.
Q.35. Briefly describe the structure of xylem tissue.
Ans. The components of xylem tissue are :
(i) Tracheids : Xylem tracheids are elongated tube like
dead cells with tapering ends. They have various types of wall
thickenings and pits (pores).
(ii) Vessels : Vessels are found only in angiosperms. They Fig. 6.11 : Tracheids and vessels the
conducting tissue for water and minerals
are long tubes placed one above the other with their end walls
perforated or dissolved.
(iii) Xylem parenchyma : These are living parenchymatous
cells present in xylem.
(iv) Xylem fibres : Fibres are longer than tracheids and have
narrow lumen.
Q.36. Describe the structure of phloem tissue. Sieve plate
Ans. The phloem tissue is composed of :
(i) Sieve elements/tubes (ii) Companian cells Sieve tube
(iii) Phloem parenchyma (iv) Phloem fibres.
(i) Sieve elements include sieve cells and tube elements. They
Companion cell
are the elements through which translocation of substances takes
place. Phloem
parenchyma
(ii) Companian cells are living parenchymatous cells. They
are always associated with sieve tubes.
(iii) They are also living cells. They are elongated with
rounded ends.
(iv) Phloem fibres are elongated and mostly occur in Fig. 6.12 : A portion of phloem tissue
secondary phloem. used for translocation by plants
Life Processes 231

Q.37. How does translocation of sugars take place through phloem ?

Ans. Sugar (sucrose – glucose) is transferred into phloem using energy from ATP (i.e., it is active
process). This increases the osmotic pressure of the tissue causing water to move into it. This pressure moves
the material in the phloem tissue which have less pressure. This allows the phloem to move material according
to plant’s need. The stored sugar from stem or roots is transported to the buds for their growth.
Q.38. How is water absorbed from the soil by the plants?
Ans. Absorption of water by roots : As the cells of the root are in contact with the soil, they take up ions
from the soil. The uptake of ions may be active with utilisation of energy. This creates a difference in the
concentration of ions between the roots and the soil. Therefore, water moves into the root under concentration
gradient to eliminate this difference. So, there is a steady movement of water into root xylem.
Q.39. How does translocation of water take place in the plants? [H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-C)]
Ans. Water forms a continuous column in the xylem tissue (tracheids/vessels). If the plant has an adequate
supply of water, the water which is lost through stomata is replaced by water from xylem vessels in the leaves.

ty ok"i
Water vapour

Fig. 6.13 : Movement of water during transpiration in a tree

Evaporation of water from the leaf surface creates a suction which pulls water from xylem cells of the
root. This is known as transpiration pull.
So, transpiration helps in absorption and upward movement of water and minerals dissolved in it from
the roots to the leaves.
Q.40. Draw labelled diagram
to show external morphology of Innominate Left common carotid artery
human heart. Left subclavian artery
Superior vena cava
Ans. Right pulmonary artery
Arotic arch

Right pulmonary vein Ligamentum arteriosum

Right auricle Left pulmonary artery

Left pulmonary veins

Left auricle
Coronary sulcus
Coronary sulcus
Right ventricle Left ventricle

Inferior vena cava Inter-ventricular groove

Fig. 6.14 : Human heart in front view

232 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.41. Explain the process of transport and exchange Capillar-

of oxygen (O2) and carbon dioxide (CO2). [2019 (Set-B)] Tra-
Arteries to
Veins from
Ans. The pulmonary veins bring oxygenated blood to the Lung
left atrium from which it is transferred to left ventricle through Pulmonary Pulmonary
Aorta
the valves. When the left ventricle contracts it sends the Right Left
oxygenated blood to all parts of the body by means of aorta (the Right Left ventricle
Liver
biggest artery). Oxygen from the blood diffuses into the tissues Digestive
and cells and carbon dioxide diffuses into the blood. The Hepatic Arteries to
deoxygenated blood is collected by the veins and is brought to Sinusoids in Arteries to
the right atrium. From right atrium, it is pushed into the right Veins
from Portal
ventricle when the right ventricle contracts, it sends the
Capillar-
deoxygenated blood to the lungs via pulmonary arteries. CO2
from deoxygenated blood diffuses into the lungs from where it Fig. 6.15 : Schematic representation of transport
is exhaled out of the body. and exchange of oxygen and carbon dioxide

Q.42. Describe the working of Right pulmonary

artery
human’s heart. [H.B.S.E. 2018 (Set-B)] Superior Aorta Left pulmonary
Ans. Working of human’s vena cava artery
heart : Oxygen-rich blood from the
Left pulmonary
lungs comes to the thin-walled upper veins
chamber of the heart on the left, the left
atrium. The left atrium relaxes when it Left
atriu
Right m
is collecting this blood. It then contracts, atrium
while the next chamber, the left
ventricle, expands, so that the blood is Inferior
vena Left ventricle
transferred to it. When the muscular left cava
ventricle contracts in its turn, the blood
is pumped out to the body.
Right ventricle
Deoxygenated blood comes from the
body to the upper chamber on the right,
the right atrium, as it expands. As the
right atrium contracts, the
corresponding lower chamber, the right
ventricle, dilates. This transfers blood Fig. 6.16 : Human’s heart
to the right ventricle, which in turn
pumps it to the lungs for oxygenation. Valves ensure that blood does not flow backwards when the atria or
ventricles contract.
Q.43. Write a note on mechanism of blood clotting.
Ans. Mechanism of blood clotting : Clotting or coagulation of blood is a complex process which
requires several factors. The major steps in blood coagulation are described below :
As blood flows out of a damaged blood vessel, blood platelets release a substance called Thromboplastin.
In the presence of calcium and thromboplastin, Prothrombin present in blood gets converted into thrombin.
Thrombin then catalyses the conversion of fibrinogen present in plasma into Fibrin. Fibrin is the ultimate
product which forms a mesh, into which red blood corpuscles get entangled and form a Blood Clot.
Given below is a flow chart showing major events in blood coagulation :
Injured tissues + blood platelets  Release thromboplastin
Prothrombin Thrombin
Fibrinogen Fibrin
Fibrin + Red blood corpuscles  Blood clot
Life Processes 233

Q.44. Draw labelled diagram to show excretory system in human beings. Briefly describe the
system. [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-A)]
Ans. The excretory system of human beings comprises of :
(a) a pair of kidneys located in abdomen, one on either side of the backbone.
(b) a pair of ureters
(c) a urinary bladder
(d) a urethra
Urine produced in the kidneys passes through the ureters into the urinary bladder where it is stored until
it is released through the urethra. The process is known as micturation.

Inferior vena cava Adrenal gland

Renal vein

Pelvis Renal
artery
Kidney
Medulla

Cortex
Dorsal aorta

Ureter

Urinary- bladder

Urethra

Fig. 6.17 : Excretory system in human beings

Q.45. Briefly describe the process of formation of urine. [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-A)]
Ans. The basic purpose of urine formation is to filter out waste products from the blood. The kidneys
remove the nitrogenous waste products like urea and uric acid. Nephrons are functional units of kidneys.
They filter the blood and remove water, minerals, some glucose, amino acids, etc. The substances like glucose,
amino acids and minerals are reabsorbed by them. The quantity of water in urine is also controlled. Thus, the
kidneys act as organs of osmoregulation also.
Q.46. How does excretion take place in plants? [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-A)]
Ans. Plants do not possess special organs for excretion. The waste products are also quite different.
(i) Excess of O2 produced during day time in the process of photosynthesis is of little use to the plant.
So, it is released into the atmosphere through stomata.
(ii) During night, CO2 is a waste product and is released into the atmosphere through stomata.
(iii) Excess of water is also released into the atmosphere through stomata.
(iv) The leaves may accumulate some waste products and fall off.
(v) The waste products stored in old xylem are resins and gums.
(vi) Plants excrete some waste substances into the soil around them.
234 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

III. Essay-Type Questions

Q.1. Briefly describe the morphology of
alimentary canal in humans.
Parotid
Ans. Alimentary canal consists of the following Mouth Buccal cavity
parts:
(i) Mouth (Buccal cavity), (ii) Pharynx, Submaxillary Pharynx
(iii) Oesophagus, (iv) Stomach, (v) Small intestine, Glottis
(vi) Large intestine, (vii) Rectum, (viii) Anus Sublingual Trachea Oesophagus
(i) Mouth (Buccal cavity) : Mouth is a transverse Liver
slit like aperture bounded by two movable lips. It is used Gall bladder
for intake of food. Fundus

Stomach
Cardiac
Mouth leads into buccal cavity. It is a large space Bile
which lies inner to the gums and teeth. It receives secretion Duodenum Body
Pyloric
of salivary glands. Pancreatic Pancreas
(ii) Pharynx : It is a common passage for food Transverse
and air. Ascending
Descending
(iii) Oesophagus : It is a long, narrow muscular
tube joining pharynx and stomach. Caecum Jejunum
(iv) Stomach : Stomach is a large muscular J Ileum
shaped sac like structure located below the diaphragm. Appendix
Sigmoid
(v) Small intestine : It is the longest part of the
Rectum
alimentary canal and is about 6 m long. It is a coiled and Anus
narrow tube which occupies the lower part of abdominal
cavity. Fig. 6.18 : Humans digestive system
(vi) Large intestine : It is wider than small intestine. It is about 1.5 metre long.
(vii) Rectum : It is the last portion of large intestine.
(viii) Anus : Rectum opens to outside by an aperture called anus, which is guarded by two apertures.
Q.2. Describe the process of digestion of food in different parts of alimentary canal.
Ans. We eat different types of food which passes through same digestive tract. It has to be processed to
generate particles which are small and of same texture. The teeth in the oral cavity crush the food. Digestion
of food starts in the mouth-oral cavity.
1. Digestion in oral cavity : In the mouth cavity, the tongue tastes the food. The teeth carry out the
function of breaking the food into small pieces and from the salivary glands, saliva comes into the mouth cavity.
Saliva contains an enzyme named as ptyalin which convert starch present in food into maltose.
2. Oesophagus : Thereafter, the food passes into the oesophagus the food pipe. No enzyme is secreted
in oesophagus. Thereafter, the food passes into stomach.
3. Stomach : From the internal lining of stomach dilute hydrochloric acid and gastric juice.
(i) The hydrochloric acid changes the medium into acidic.
(ii) It softens the hard food.
(iii) It kills harmful bacteria.
The gastric juice contains two enzymes :
(i) Renin : It splits the milk.
(ii) Pepsin : It converts protein of food into peptones.
4. Duodenum : The first part of the intestine is called duodenum. Two types of digestive juices are
secreted into it. Pancreatic juice from pancreas and bile from liver.
Life Processes 235

(a) The bile juice from liver is a kind of alkaline juice which changes the medium from acidic to
alkaline. The bile breaks the larger pieces of fat into smaller pieces and makes emulsion.
(b) The pancreatic juice contains three enzymes :
(i) Trypsin : It converts peptones into peptides.
(ii) Amylase : It converts carbohydrate into maltose.
(iii) Lipase : It converts emulsion of fats into fatty acid and glycerol.
5. Small Intestine : Digestive juice is secreted from walls of small intestine which contain five enzymes:
(i) Peptidase : It converts peptides into amino acids. [H.B.S.E. 2017 (Set-B)]
(ii) Lipase : It converts the rest of fats into fatty acid and glycerol.
(iii) Sucrase : It converts sucrose into glucose.
(iv) Maltase : It converts maltose into glucose.
(v) Lactase : It converts lactose into glucose.
The inner surface of the small intestine have many villi which absorb the digested food and get it mixed
into blood. This process is called absorption. The blood transfers the digested food to all the cells by process
of diffusion.
6. Large intestine : Digestion of food does not take place in large intestine. Additional quantity
of water is absorbed in large intestine and faeces get collected in the rectum and is egested out from
time-to-time.
Q.3. Describe the composition of blood in detail.
Ans. Humans blood : Blood is a red coloured fluid connective tissue. It has two main components :
(a) Blood plasma, (b) Blood corpuscles
(a) Blood plasma : It is a light yellow coloured fluid. It contains 90% water and rest of it is formed of
salts, glucose, aminoacids, proteins, hormones, oxygen, carbon dioxide gas and some digested and undigested
material.
Cytoplasm

Nucleus
Surface view Side view
Lymphocyte Monocyte
Erythrocytes (red agranular leucocytes
blood cells)
Granules Drumstick
Nucleus

Nucleus

Cytoplasm Granules
Basophil Eosinophil Neutrophil
Granular leucocytes
Human blood corpuscles

Nucleus Nucleus

Blood platelets RBC of frog Thrombocyte

Fig. 6.19 : Different blood cells

236 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Function : It contains fibrinogen, a protein which helps in clotting of blood. It also contains antigen and
antibodies which inactivates foreign material like bacteria, etc.
(b) Blood corpuscles : There are present three types of corpuscles in the blood, which can be explained
as follow :
(i) Red blood corpuscles : These are rounded, somewhat compressed cells. The life of red blood
corpuscles is about 4 months. These contain a red coloured protein named haemoglobin. These are rounded,
flat and small. These lack nucleus. Their number is very large (50 lakhs per cubic millimeter).
Function : (1) They provide red colour to blood. (2) Haemoglobin present in them distribute oxygen to
all parts of the body. These cells form oxyhaemoglobin by reacting with oxygen.
(ii) White blood corpuscles : The number of white blood corpuscles is less than red blood corpuscles
but these are larger in size. These are colourless and do not contain haemoglobin. Their shape is also not
definite. They contain nucleus also. These are of five types.
Function : These kill pathogens which happen to enter into the body and engulf them. This way, these
protect our body from pathogens. And provide immunity to the body.
(iii) Thrombocytes : The thrombocytes are thick in the middle and thin at the edges. These are very
small and possess nucleus also.
Function : These help in clotting of blood when blood oozes out due to wonds, then these get collected
at the wound site and by a chemical reaction set themselves, so that no more blood oozes out.
Q.4. (a) What is meant by blood pressure ?
(b) It is high in arteries or veins. Explain.
(c) Differentiate between systolic and diastolic pressure.
(d) What is the normal systolic and diastolic pressure ?
(e) Name the instrument which is used to measure blood pressure.
(f) What is hypertension ?
Ans. (a) The force that blood exerts against the wall of a blood vessel is called blood pressure.
(b) It is high in the arteries.
(c) The pressure of blood inside the arteries during ventricular contraction (systol) is called systolic
pressure.
The pressure of blood inside the arteries during ventricular relaxation (diastole) is called diastolic pressure.

Blood
pressure 120/80
Pressure Pressure Pressure
(120 systolic.
in cuff in cuff in cuff
80 diastolic)
above 120 below 120 below 80
(to be measured)
120
120
Rubber cuff
inflated 80
with air
Artery closed
Sounds
audible in Sounds
stethoscope stop
Artery

Fig. 6.20
Life Processes 237

(d) Normal systolic pressure is about 120 mm Hg.

Normal diastolic pressure is about 80 mm Hg.
(e) Sphygmomanometer.
(f) High blood pressure is known as hypertension.
Q. 5. (a) What are artificial kidneys ?
(b) Why do we need them ?
(c) How does it work ?
Ans. (a) Artificial kidneys : It is a device which is used
to remove nitrogenous waste products from the blood through
dialysis.
(b) We need artificial kidneys because several factors like
infections, injury, restricted blood flow to kidneys reduce the
activity of kidneys. This leads to accumulation of harmful waste
products in the body which can lead to death.
(c) An artificial kidney works on the principle of dialysis.
Dialysis : The process of separation by which the small
molecules like water, urea and uric acid come out of blood due
to filtering but the large molecules like proteins do not.
Artificial kidneys contain a number of tubes with a semi-
permeable lining, suspended in a tank filled with dialysing fluid.
This fluid has the same osmotic pressure as blood, except that it
is devoid of nitrogenous wastes. The patient’s blood is passed
through these tubes. During this passage, the waste products Fig. 6.21
from the blood pass into dialysing fluid by diffusion. The
purified blood is pumped back into the patient. This is similar to kidney function, but it is also different in that
there is no re-absorption involved. Normally, in a healthy adult, the initial filtrate in the kidneys is about 180
L daily. However, the volume actually excreted is only a litre or two a day, because the remaining filtrate is
reabsorbed in the kidney tubules.

Experiment 1. To prove that chlorophyll is essential

Green part
for photosynthesis. OR
Non-green Blue part
To test the leaves for presence of starch. part

Requirement : A potted plant with variegated leaves,

beakers water, alcohol, iodine solution.
Procedure : (i) Take a potted plant with variegated leaves
for example money plant or crotons.
(ii) Keep the plant in dark for three days so that all the
starch gets used up. Yellow part
(iii) Then, keep the plant in sunlight for six hours.
(iv) Pluck a leaf from the plant. Mark the green areas (a) (b)
in it and trace them on a sheet of paper. Fig. 6.22 : Variegated leaf (a) before and
(v) Dip the leaf in boiling water for a few minutes. (b) after starch test
238 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

(vi) Immerse the leaf in beaker containing alcohol.

(vii) Keep the beaker in water bath and heat till the alcohol begins to boil. The leaf becomes colourless
and the colour of solution becomes green.
(viii) Then dip the leaf in dilute iodine solution for a few minutes.
(ix) Take out the leaf and rinse it in water.
(x) Observe the colour of leaf.
Observation : Blue colouration only in areas where chlorophyll was present.
Conclusion/Result : Chlorophyll is essential for photosynthesis and starch is synthesized by the green
plants during photosynthesis.
Experiment 2. To prove that CO2 is essential for photosynthesis.
Requirement : Two potted plants, bell jars, potassium hydroxide, iodine solution.
Procedure : (i) Take two potted plants almost of same size.
(ii) Keep them in dark room for three days.
(iii) Then place them on separate glass plates. Place a watch glass containing KOH by the side of one
of the plant.
(iv) Cover both the plants with separate bell jars.
(v) Use vaseline to seal the bottom of the jars to glass plates, so that the system is air tight.
(vi) Keep the plants in sunlight for about two hours.
(vii) Pluck a leaf from each plant and check for the presence of starch with iodine solution.
Observation : The leaf of the plant with which no KOH was placed shows presence of more starch.
Result/Conclusion : KOH absorbs CO2 from air. Very little or no photosynthesis has taken place without
CO2. It means CO2 is essential for photosynthesis.
Experiment 3. To prove that saliva
contains carbohydrate digesting enzyme –
Amylase.
Requirement : 1% starch solution, test Bell jar
tubes, saliva, iodine solution.
Procedure :

(i) Take 1 mL 1% starch solution in

two test tubes A and B.
Watch glass
(ii) Add 1 mL saliva to test tube A and containing
leave both test tubes, undisturbed for 20-30 potassium
hydroxide
minutes.
(iii) Add a few drops of dilute iodine
solution to the test tubes and observe. (a) (b)
Observation : Only tube B shows the Fig. 6.23 : Experimental set-up (a) with potassium hydroxide
presence of starch and test tube A shows (b) without potassium hydroxide.
absence of starch.
Life Processes 239

Result/Conclusion : Saliva has converted starch into

sugar (Maltose). It means it contains a carbohydrate digesting
enzyme.
Experiment 4. To prove that CO2 is produced during
respiration.
Requirement : Lime water, test tube, glass tubes.
Procedure : (i) Take some freshly prepared lime water
in two test tubes.
(ii) Blow air through this lime water in one test tube.
(iii) Use a pichkari to pass air through lime water in Fig. 6.24 :

another test tube.

(iv) Note the time it takes to turn lime water milky in both the cases.
Observation : It takes little time to turn lime water milky when we blow air through it as compared to
the air used in pichkari.
Result/Conclusion : Respiration produces CO2 in large quantity than CO2 present in air.
Experiment 5. To study the process and products of fermentation.
Requirement : Fruit juice or sugar solution, lime water, test tubes, yeast powder.
Procedure : (i) Take some fruit juice or sugar solution in flask.
(ii) Add some yeast powder to this.
(iii) Fit a one holed cork and a ‘U’ shaped delivery tube in its mouth.
(iv) Dip the free end of the glass tube into a test tube containing freshly prepared lime water, observe
and smell.
Observation : (i) The lime water turns milky.
(ii) The mixture of fruit juice/sugar and yeast give
characteristic smell with bubbles coming out.

Result/Conclusion : (i) One of the products of fermentation

Fig. 6.25
is CO2.
(ii) The other product is ethyl alcohol with its characteristic smell.
Experiment 6. To compare the rate of breathing (respiration) in aquatic and terrestrial animals.
Requirement : Fishes in aquarium.
Procedure : (i) Observe a fish in an aquarium. They open and close their mouths and gill slits present
behind their eyes.
(ii) Count the number of times the fish opens and closes its mouth in a minute.
(iii) Compare this to the number of times you breathe in and out in a minute.
Observation : In a minute we breath 10-12 times and the fishes 15 times or more.
Result/Conclusion : The rate of respiration/breathing is more in aquatic animals as they get less quantity
of O2 dissolved in water.
Experiment 7. To study the movement of water during transpiration in a tree.
Requirement : Two potted plants, stick, two plastic sheets, etc.
240 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Procedure :
(i) Take two small pots of approximately the same size and having the same amount of soil. One should
have a plant in it. Place a stick of the same height as the plant in the other pot.
(ii) Cover the soil in both pots with a plastic sheet so that moisture cannot escape by evaporation.
(iii) Cover both sets, one with the plant and the other with the stick, with plastic sheets and place in
bright sunlight for half an hour.
(iv) Do you observe any difference in the two cases ?
Observation :
(i) There are lot of water drops on the plastic cover, used to cover the plants.
(ii) There are not such big water drops in the other cover over the second pot with a stick.
Result/Conclusion : Loss of water takes place from the surface of leaves, young stem, etc., which is
known as transpiration.


 PHYSICS
PHYSICS

10 LIGHT : REFLECTION AND REFRACTION

SCIENTIFIC TERMS
1. Light : Light is a form of radiant energy that causes the sensation of sight in our eyes.
2. Reflection of light : When a ray of light falls on a polished smooth surface, such as a mirror it
returns back into the same medium. This is called reflection of light.
3. Refraction of light : When light enters from one transparent medium into another transparent
medium, it changes its path is called refraction of light.
4. Transparent medium : A medium through which light can pass.
5. Ray of light : The path along which light seem to travel or propagated.
6. Diffraction of light : The tendency of light rays to bend when an opaque object comes on the path
of light.
7. Spherical mirrors : Mirrors whose reflecting surfaces are spherical, are called spherical mirrors.
8. Concave mirror : A spherical mirror whose reflecting surface is curved inwards, is called a concave
mirror.
9. Convex mirror : A spherical mirror whose reflecting surface is curved outwards, is called a convex
mirror.
10. Pole of mirror : The centre of the reflecting surface of a spherical mirror is a point called the pole.
11. Centre of curvature : The centre of the sphere, the spherical mirror is a part of which, is called
centre of curvature.
12. Radius of curvature : The radius of the sphere of which the reflecting surface of a spherical mirror
forms a part.
13. Principal axis : A straight line passing through the pole and the centre of curvature of a spherical
mirror.
14. Principal focus : The rays of light coming parallel to the principal axis, after reflection meet at a
point on the principal axis, this point is called principal focus.
15. Focal length : The distance between the pole and the principal focus of a spherical mirror is called
focal length.
16. New Cartesian sign conventions : A set of sign conventions used while dealing with the reflection
of light by spherical mirrors, is called cartesian sign conventions.

cont...
349
350 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

17. Real image : An image which can be taken on screen, is called real image.
18. Virtual image : An image which cannot be taken on a screen, is called virtual image.
19. Mirror formula : The mathematical relationship between distance of object (u), distance of image
(v) and focal length (f ) of a mirror, is called mirror formula.

20. Magnification : Magnification produced by a spherical mirror gives the relative extent to which
the image of an object is magnified with respect to the object size.
21. Refractive index : It is defined as the ratio of speed of light in air to the speed of light in a medium.

nm =

22. Optical density : The ability of a medium to refract light, is called optical density.
23. Rarer medium : The medium of lower refractive index, is called rarer medium.
24. Denser medium : The medium of higher refractive index, is called optically denser medium.
25. Magnifying Lens : A simple biconvex lens used for magnifying small objects.
26. Lens : A transparent material bound by two surfaces, of which one or both surfaces are spherical,
forms a lens.
27. Convex lens : A lens having two spherical surfaces, bulging outwards.
28. Concave lens : A lens having two spherical surfaces curved inwards.
29. Principal axis of lens : An imaginary straight line passing through the two centres of curvature of
a lens.
30. Optical centre : The central point of a lens is called optical centre.
31. Aperture : The effective diameter of the circular outline of a spherical lens, is called its aperture.
32. Principal focus : Rays of light parallel to the principal axis, after refraction from the lens, converge
to a point on the principal axis, is called principal focus.
33. Focal length : The distance of the principal focus from the optical centre of a lens is called its focal
length.
34. Lens formula : The relationship among the distance of object (u) from the optical centre of lens,
the distance of image (v) and the focal length of lens, is called lens formula.

35. Magnification : It is defined as the ratio of the height of the image to the height of the object.

36. Power of lens : It is defined as the ability of a lens to converge or diverge light rays. OR
It may also be defined as the reciprocal of focal length of a lens.

P=

37. Image : The point of convergence or the point from where the light appears to diverge after reflection
or refraction is called image.
38. Angle of incidence : The angle between incident ray and the normal at the point of incidence is
called angle of incident.
cont...
Light : Reflection and Refraction 351

39. Angle of reflection : The angle between reflected ray and the normal at the point of reflection, is
called angle of reflection.
Relation between radius of curvature and focal length.
R = 2f
40. Aperture of spherical mirror : It is the angle subtended by the face of the mirror at the centre of
curvature.
41. Dioptre : The unit of power of lens. One dioptre is the power of lens whose focal length is 1 metre.

CHAPTER AT A GLANCE
1. Light is a form of energy which helps us to see objects.
2. There are a number of wonderful phenomena associated with light.
3. Light seems to travel in straight line.
4. Light is thought of a wave and stream of particles.
5. Reflection of light takes place according to certain rules known as laws of reflection.
6. Image formed by a plane mirror is always virtual, erect and laterally inverted.
7. Mirrors whose reflecting surfaces are spherical, are called spherical mirrors.
8. Spherical mirrors are of two types – convex and concave.
9. A concave mirror is a converging mirror whereas a convex mirror is a diverging mirror.
10. The principal focus of a spherical mirror lies midway between the pole and centre of curvature.
R = 2f
11. Images formed by concave mirrors are mostly real and inverted and are formed on the same side
of the mirror.
12. Convex mirrors are used as rear view mirrors in vehicles.
13. Concave mirrors are used in headlights and search lights.
14. Mirror formula shows the relationship among u, v and f.
15. Magnification defines the relative extent to which the image of an object is magnified with respect
to the object size.
16. A negative sign in the value of the magnification indicates that the image is real. A positive sign
in the value of the magnification indicates that the image is virtual.
17. Refraction of light means bending of light when it enters from one transparent medium into the
other.
18. Refraction occurs due to change in the speed of light as it enters from one transparent medium to
another.
19. Refractive index of a medium is the ratio of speed of light in air to the speed of light in the medium.
20. Diamond has the highest refractive index, 2.42.
21. The speed of light is higher in rarer medium as compared to denser medium.
22. Spherical lenses find many important uses in instruments like microscope, telescope.

23. Lens formula is used to solve many problems concerning with distance of object

image and focal length of lens.

cont...
352 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

24. Magnification is the ratio of size of the image with the size of the object.
25. Power of a lens is defined as the ability of a lens to converge or diverge light rays.
P=
26. The SI unit of power of a lens is dioptre.

TEXTUAL QUESTIONS

Questions on Article 10.2 (PAGE–168)

Q.1. Define the principal focus of a concave mirror.
Ans. Principal focus of a concave mirror is the point on principal axis on which the rays of light parallel
to the principal axis meet after reflection from the mirror.
Q.2. The radius of curvature of a spherical mirror is 20 cm. What is its focal length ?
Ans. R = 20 cm, f = ?

R = 2f or =f

Focal length (f) = = 10 cm

Q.3. Name a mirror that can give an erect and enlarged image of an object.
Ans. Concave mirror.
Q.4. Why do we prefer a convex mirror as a rear-view mirror in vehicles ?
Ans. A convex mirror is used as a rear-view mirror in vehicles because :
(i) the image formed is always erect.
(ii) the image formed is always small.
(iii) it covers the rear-view to the full extent.
Questions on Article 10.2 (PAGE–171)
Q.1. Find the focal length of a convex mirror whose radius of curvature is 32 cm.

Ans. Focal length (f ) = = 16 cm.

Q.2. A concave mirror produces three times magnified (enlarged) real image of an object placed
at 10 cm in front of it. Where is the image located ?
Ans. As the image formed is real.
So, Magnification, (m) = –3
u = –10 cm (For concave mirror)

Magnification (m) =

–3 =

–3 =

v = – 30 cm
The image is located at 30 cm in front of the mirror.
Light : Reflection and Refraction 353

Questions on Article 10.3 (PAGE–176)

Q.1. A ray of light travelling in air enters obliquely into water. Does the light ray bend towards
the normal or away from the normal ? Why ?
Ans. Air is a rarer medium and water is a denser medium.
When ray of light travels from air into water it bends towards the normal. This is because the speed of
light in water is less than air.
Q.2. Light enters from air to glass having refracting index 1.50. What is the speed of light in the
glass ? The speed of light in vacuum is 3 × 108 ms–1. [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-A)]

Ans. Refractive index of a glass (n) =

1.5 =

Speed of light in glass (c) =

= 2 × 108 m/s.
Q.3. Find out, from table 10.3 in textbook, (i) the medium having highest optical density. (ii) Also
find the medium with lowest optical density.
Ans. (i) The medium with highest optical density is diamond.
(ii) The medium with lowest optical density is air.
Q.4. You are given kerosene, turpentine and water. In which of these does the light travel
fastest ? Use the information given in table 10.3.
Ans. Light travels fastest in water out of the given substances because its refractive index is very low.
Q.5. The refractive index of diamond is 2.42. What is the meaning of this statement ?
Ans. The refractive index of diamond is 2.42. It means that the ratio of speed of light in air and the speed
of light in diamond is equal to 2.42.

Questions on Article 10.3 (PAGE–184)

Q.1. Define one dioptre power of a lens.
Ans. One dioptre is the power of a lens whose focal length is 1 metre.
1 D = 1 m–1.
Q.2. A convex lens forms a real and inverted image of a needle at a distance of 50 cm from it.
Where is the needle placed in front of the convex lens, if the image is equal to the size of the object ?
Also, find the power of the lens.
Ans. Image distance (v) = 50 cm
Object distance (u) = ?
But if the image is equal to the size of the object, then
u = v = 50 cm
In case of convex lens above condition is obtained only when the object is placed at centre of curvature, C.
Therefore, radius of curvature (R) = 50 cm
f = = 25 cm = 0.25 m

Power of lens (P) =

354 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.3. Find the power of a concave lens of focal length 2 m.

Ans. The power of a concave lens is negative.

P =

Hence the power of concave lens (P) = – 0.5 D.

TEXTUAL EXERCISES
Q.1. Which one of the following materials cannot be used to make a lens ?
(a) Water (b) Glass (c) Plastic (d) Clay
Ans. (d) Clay
Q.2. The image formed by a concave mirror is observed to be virtual, erect and larger than the
object. Where should be the position of the object ?
(a) Between the principal focus and the (b) At the centre of curvature
centre of curvature
(c) Beyond the centre of curvature (d) Between the pole of the mirror and its
principal focus
Ans. (d) Between the pole of the mirror and its principal focus
Q.3. Where should an object be placed in front of a convex lens to get a real image of the size of the
object ?
(a) At the principal focus of the lens (b) At twice the focal length
(c) At infinity (d) Between the optical centre of the lens and its
principal focus
Ans. (b) At twice the focal length
Q.4. A spherical mirror and a thin spherical lens have each a focal length of – 15 cm. The mirror
and the lens are likely to be :
(a) both concave (b) both convex
(c) the mirror is concave and the lens is convex (d) The mirror is convex, but the lens is concave.
Ans. (a) Both concave
Q.5. No matter how far you stand from a mirror, your image appears erect. The mirror is likely to
be :
(a) only plane (b) only concave (c) only convex (d) either plane or convex
Ans. (d) either plane or convex
Q.6. Which of the following lenses would you prefer to use while reading small letters found in a
dictionary?
(a) A convex lens of focal length 50 cm (b) A concave lens of focal length 50 cm
(c) A convex lens of focal length 5 cm (d) A concave lens of focal length 5 cm.
Ans. (c) A convex lens of focal length 5 cm
Q.7. We wish to obtain an erect image of an object, using a concave mirror of focal length 15 cm.
What should be the range of distance of the object from the mirror ? What is the nature of the image ?
Is the image larger or smaller than the object ? Draw a ray diagram to show the image formation in this
case.
Ans. (a) To obtain an erect image of an object, using a concave mirror when the object is placed
between pole P of mirror and focus F.
(b) The range of distance of the object from the mirror is between 0-15 cm.
Light : Reflection and Refraction 355

(c) The nature of image is virtual and erect.

(d) The image is larger than the object.

A
M

A Image

C F B P B
15 cm

N
Fig. 10.1 : Diagram of Image

Q.8. Name the type of mirror used in the following situations :

(a) Headlights of a car (b) Side/rear-view mirror of a vehicle (c) Solar furnace.
Support your answer with reason.
Ans. (a) Concave mirror, so as to reflect parallel beam of light to long distance.
(b) Convex mirror, so that images formed are small and erect and provide full rear-view.
(c) Concave mirrors, so as to converge heat radiations to a point.
Q.9. One half of a convex lens is covered with a black paper. Will this lens produce a complete
image of the object ? Verify your answer experimentally. Explain your observations.
Ans. Yes, the convex lens will produce a complete image of the object.
The rays of light from the object pass through half lens and produce complete image.
Q.10. An object 5 cm in length is held 25 cm away from a converging lens of focal length 10 cm.
Draw the ray diagram and find the position, size and the nature of the image formed.
Ans.
A

Object
5 cm

B
B 2F F1 F2 2F2
10 cm Image
A

Fig. 10.2 : Diagram of Image

Height of object (h) = 5 cm

Distance of object (u) = – 25 cm
Focal length of lens (f ) = + 10 cm

Using lens formula, =

356 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

v = = +16.67 cm

The image is formed on distance 16.67 cm other side of the lens.

Magnification (m) =

Height of image (h) = h ×

h =

h =
–
h =  h = –3.33 cm
Here, negative sign indicates real, inverted image formed below the principal axis.
Q.11. A concave lens of local length 15 cm forms an image 10 cm from the lens. How far is the
object placed from the lens? Draw the ray diagram.
Ans. Focal length of concave lens (f ) = – 15 cm
Distance of image from lens (v) = – 10 cm
Distance of object from lens (u) = ?
Applying lens formula

A
O
B F1 F2 2F2
2F1 B 10 cm
15 cm
30 cm

Fig. 10.3 : Ray Diagram

Light : Reflection and Refraction 357

u = – 30 cm
Distance of object from the lens is 30 cm.
Q.12. An object is placed at a distance of 10 cm from a convex mirror of focal length 15 cm. Find
the position and nature of the image.
Ans. Focal length of convex mirror (f ) = 15 cm
Distance of object from mirror (u) = –10 cm
Distance of image from mirror (v) = ?

Using mirror formula, =

=
or v = + 6 cm
The image formed is at 6 cm away from the mirror at its back. It is virtual, small and erect.
Q.13. The magnification produced by a plane mirror is +1. What does this mean ?
Ans. Positive sign (+) of magnification means that the image formed is virtual.
m = + 1 means that the size of the image formed is same as that of the object.
Q.14. An object 5.0 cm in length is placed at a distance of 20 cm in front of a convex mirror of
radius of curvature 30 cm. Find the position of the image, its nature and size.
Ans. Radius of curvature of the convex mirror (R)= 30 cm

 Focal length of the mirror (f ) = = = 15 cm

Distance of object (u) = –20 cm

Size of object (h) = 5.0 cm
Distance of image (v) = ?
Size of image (h) = ?

Using mirror formula, =

=
358 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

v = = 8.57 cm

So, the image formed is 8.57 cm at the back of the mirror.

Magnification (m) =

m =

m =

h = = 2.14 cm

So, the image is virtual, erect and 2.14 cm in size.

Q.15. An object of size 7.0 cm is placed at 27 cm in front of a concave mirror of focal length 18 cm.
At what distance from the mirror should a screen be placed, so that a sharp focussed image can be
obtained ? Find the size and the nature of the image.
Ans. Focal length of the concave mirror (f ) = – 18 cm
Distance of object from mirror (u) = –27 cm
Size of the object, h = + 7.0 cm
Distance of image (v) = ?
Size of image (h) = ?

Using mirror formula, =

= =

Distance of image, v = –54 cm

So, the screen should be placed at a distance of 54 cm from the mirror on the object side of the mirror
and the image formed is real.

Now, Magnification, (m) = =

h =
Light : Reflection and Refraction 359

Size of image (h) = –14 cm

The image is real, inverted and double the size of the object.
Q.16. Find the focal length of a lens of power –2.0 D. What type of lens is this ?
Ans. Power of the lens (P) = – 2.0 D [H.B.S.E. March, 2019 (Set-B, D)]

P =

–2.0 =

f (m) =
f = – 50 cm
So, the focal length of the lens is 50 cm.
As the power of the lens is negative, therefore, the lens is concave.
Q.17. A doctor has prescribed a corrective lens of power +1.5 D. Find the focal length of the lens.
Is the prescribed lens diverging or converging ?
Ans. The power of the given corrective lens is +1.5 D.

Power (P) =

1.5 =

f (m) =

f =

f = 66.66 cm
So, the focal length of the lens is 66.66 cm.
As the power of the lens is positive, so, the prescribed lens is a converging lens (convex lens).

EXAMINATION BASED OTHER IMPORTANT QUESTIONS

I. Very Short-Answer Type Questions

A. Multiple Choice Questions
1. Focal length of plane mirror is :
(A) zero (B) one
(C) infinity (D) depend upon quality of mirror
Ans. (C) infinity
2. Magnification produced by a plane mirror is :
(A) + 1 (B) – 1
(C) <1 (D) > 1
Ans. (A) + 1
360 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

3. Image formed by a plane mirror is :

(A) erect, virtual and of same size (B) erect, virtual and of large size
(C) erect, virtual and of small size (D) real, inverted and of same size
Ans. (A) erect, virtual and of same size
4. Focal length of a concave mirror is :
(A) always positive (B) always negative
(C) positive when image formed is real (D) negative when image formed is real
Ans. (B) always negative
5. The magnification produced by a mirror is 1/3, then the type of mirror is :
(A) concave (B) convex
(C) plane (D) parabolic
Ans. (B) convex
 4
6. The concave mirror of focal length f (in air) is immersed in water  nw =  . The focal length of the
 3
mirror in water is :
(A) 3/4 f (B) 4/3 f
(C) f (D) none of the above
Ans. (C) f
7. The field of view is maximum for :
(A) plane mirror (B) concave mirror
(C) convex mirror (D) parabolic mirror
Ans. (C) convex mirror
8. The refractive index of glass is 3/2. What will be the speed of light in glass ?
(A) 2 × 108 m/s (B) 2.25 × 108 m/s
8 8
(C) 1.5 × 10 m/s (D) 1.33 × 10 m/s
Ans. (A) 2 × 108 m/s
9. If a ray of light falls normally on a glass slab then the angle of refraction in glass slab is :
(A) 90° (B) 45°
(C) 30° (D) 0°
Ans. (D) 0°
10. Twinkling of stars is due to :
(A) periodic bursts of light from the star (B) partial absorption of light in the atmosphere
(C) interference between light coming from various (D) refractive index fluctuations in the
stars atmosphere
Ans. (D) refractive index fluctuations in the atmosphere
11. If ng and nw are absolute refractive indices of glass, then refractive index of glass with respect to
water is :
(A) ng /nw (B) nw /ng
(C) ng – nw (D) ng + nw
Ans. (A) ng /nw
12. In optical fibres, the principle used is :
(A) scattering (B) reflection
(C) refraction (D) total internal reflection
Ans. (D) total internal reflection
13. A stick partially immersed in water appears broken due to :
(A) reflection (B) refraction
(C) total internal reflection (D) dispersion
Ans. (B) refraction
Light : Reflection and Refraction 361

14. A virtual image larger than the object can be formed by :

(A) concave mirror (B) convex mirror
(C) plane mirror (D) none of these
Ans. (A) concave mirror
15. Lateral displacement in a glass slab is :
(A) directly proportional to its thickness (B) inversely proportional to its thickness
(C) independent of its thickness (D) none of these
Ans. (A) directly proportional to its thickness
16. Mirage is formed in hot deserts due to :
(A) reflection (B) refraction
(C) total internal reflection (D) dispersion
Ans. (C) total internal reflection
17. If an object is placed at 2F in front of a convex lens, the image lies :
(A) at F (B) at 2F
(C) between F and 2F (D) beyond 2F
Ans. (B) at 2F
F
18. An object is placed at a distance of from a convex lens, then the image will be formed at a
2
distance of :
(A) 3F/2 (B) 2F
(C) 3F (D) F
Ans. (D) F
19. The focal length of a concave lens is 50 cm. Its pressure is :
(A) – 2.0 D (B) + 2.0 D
(C) – 0.5 D (D) + 0.5 D
Ans. (A) – 2.0 D
20. Two lenses of powers +6.0 D and – 4.0 D are put in contact with each other. The power of the
combination is:
(A) 10.0 D (B) + 2.0 D
(C) – 2.0 D (D) 24.0 D
Ans. (B) + 2.0 D
21. When light enters from air into glass, which of the following does not change ?
(A) Wavelength (B) Velocity
(C) Frequency (D) All quantities will change
Ans. (C) Frequency
22. The unit of power of a lens is :
(A) watt (B) kilowatt
(C) dioptre (D) none of these
Ans. (C) dioptre
23. The angle of incidence is ............. to the angle of reflection.
(A) equal (B) larger
(C) smaller (D) no relationship
Ans. (A) equal
24. Which of the mirror(s) only form virtual image ?
(A) Concave mirror (B) Convex mirror
(C) Plane mirror (D) (B) and (C) both
Ans. (D) (B) and (C) both
362 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

25. The image of distant objects is formed :

(A) at pole (B) at C
(C) at F (D) between C and F
Ans. (C) at F
26. Aperture of the reflecting surface of spherical mirror is :
(A) diameter of reflecting surface (B) radius of reflecting surface
(C) focus of reflecting surface (D) curvature of reflecting surface
Ans. (A) diameter of reflecting surface
27. The relationship between radius of curvature and focus is :
(A) R = f (B) R = 2f
(C) R = f/2 (D) R = 4f
Ans. (B) R = 2f
28. The concave mirror forms the virtual image in which of the following conditions of the object ?
(A) When the object is at infinity (B) When the object is at 2F
(C) When the object is at F (D) When the object is between F and P
Ans. (D) When the object is between F and P
29. The image formed by a convex mirror is always :
(A) real (B) virtual
(C) real or virtual (D) real and virtual both
Ans. (B) virtual
30. The mirror used by a driver to view the rear side is :
(A) concave (B) convex
(C) plane (D) none of these
Ans. (B) convex
31. In new cartesian sign conventions in case of mirrors, all distances are measured from :
(A) focus (B) centre of curvature
(C) pole of mirror (D) the position of object
Ans. (C) pole of mirror
32. A negative sign in the value of magnification indicates that the image is :
(A) virtual (B) enlarged
(C) real (D) diminished
Ans. (C) real
33. The positive sign is the value of magnification indicates that the image is :
(A) real (B) virtual
(C) enlarged (D) diminished
Ans. (B) virtual
34. A lemon kept in water in a glass tumbler appears to be bigger than its actual size, when viewed
from the sides. It is because of :
(A) reflection of light (B) dispersion of light
(C) refraction of light (D) scattering of light
Ans. (C) refraction of light
Light : Reflection and Refraction 363

35. When light travels obliquely from one transparent medium into another, then the direction of
propagation of light changes in the second medium, this is known as :
(A) dispersion of light (B) reflection of light
(C) convergence of light (D) refraction of light
Ans. (D) refraction of light
36. The substance having highest refractive index is :
(A) water (B) air
(C) alcohol (D) diamond
Ans. (D) diamond
37. The refractive index of glass is approximately :
(A) 1.33 (B) 1.52
(C) 1.71 (D) 2.42
Ans. (B) 1.52
38. The concave lens always forms images which are :
(A) real (B) virtual
(C) diminished (D) (B) and (C) both
Ans. (D) (B) and (C) both
39. The negative sign of m and h in case of a lens means that the image is :
(A) real (B) inverted
(C) virtual (D) (A) and (B) both
Ans. (D) (A) and (B) both
40. The power of a convex lens is :
(A) positive (B) negative
(C) negative or positive (D) none of these
Ans. (A) positive
41. The power of a lens is – 4.0 D. The nature of lens is :
(A) concave (B) convex
(C) diverging (D) (A) and (C) both
Ans. (D) (A) and (C) both
42. The speed of light is maximum in :
(A) air (B) water
(C) vacuum (D) diamond
Ans. (C) vacuum
43. Which of the following is a property of light ?
(A) reflection (B) refraction
(C) dispersion (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
44. The image formed by a plane mirror are :
(A) real (B) virtual
(C) both real and virtual (D) neither real nor virtual
Ans. (B) virtual
364 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

45. The angle of reflection for a normal incident is :

(A) 0° (B) 45°
(C) 90° (D) 180°
Ans. (C) 90°
46. Shaving mirrors are :
(A) concave (B) convex
(C) plane (D) none of these
Ans. (A) concave
47. What will be the focal length of a mirror having radius of curvature 20 cm ?
(A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm
(C) 40 cm (D) 5 cm
Ans. (A) 10 cm
48. Mirrors used in solar cookers are :
(A) plane (B) concave
(C) convex (D) none of these
Ans. (B) concave
49. The power of a concave lens of focal length 2 m is :
(A) + 0.05 D (B) – 0.5 D
(C) – 2.0 D (D) + 2.0 D
Ans. (B) – 0.5 D
50. The sign of power of a convex lens is :
(A) positive (B) negative
(C) positive or negative (D) none of the these
Ans. (A) positive
51. A thick lens has less focal length. Its power will be :
(A) less (B) more
(C) zero (D) not related to focal length
Ans. (B) more
52. If we consider refraction of light from glass slab, if i is the angle of incidence and e is the angle of
emergence then :
(A) e > i (B) e < i
(C) e = i (D) none of these
Ans. (C) e = i
53. The power of a glass slab is :
(A) 1 D (B) 2 D
(C) 0.5 D (D) zero
Ans. (D) zero
sin i
54. The relation = n is known as :
sin r
(A) Snell’s law (B) Newton’s law
(C) Mendel’s law (D) Archimede’s principle
Ans. (A) Snell’s law
4
55. The refractive index of water w.r.t. air is . The refractive index of air w.r.t. water will be :
3
(A) 1 (B) 1.33
(C) 0.75 (D) none of these
Ans. (C) 0.75
Light : Reflection and Refraction 365

4 3
56. The refractive index of water with respect to air is and that of glass with respect to air is .
3 2
Then, the refractive index of glass with respect to water is :

(A) (B)
(C) 1.33 (D) 1.5
Ans. (A)
57. If the refractive index of diamond is 2.4, the velocity of light in diamond is :
(A) 3 × 108 m/s (B) 2.4 × 108 m/s
(C) 1.25 × 108 m/s (D) 1.5 × 108 m/s
8
Ans. (C) 1.25 × 10 m/s
58. The lateral displacement of light when it passes through glass slab depends on :
(A) thickness of slab (B) angle of incidence
(C) wavelength of light (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
59. When a ray of light moves from an optically denser medium to an optically rarer medium, it :
(A) bends away from normal (B) bends towards normal
(C) remain underiated (D) do not know
Ans. (A) bends away from normal
60. A spherical mirror and a spherical lens, both have the same focal length –15 cm. Then :
(A) both are convex (B) both are concave
(C) mirror is convex, lens is concave (D) mirror is concave, lens is convex
Ans. (B) both are concave
61. What will be the nature of image formed by a concave mirror of focal length 15 cm, if the object
is placed at a distance of 5 cm from the mirror ?
(A) Real and magnified (B) Real and diminished in size
(C) Virtual and magnified (D) Virtual and diminished
Ans. (C) Virtual and magnified
62. What will be the distance between the object and the image, if the object has been placed at a
distance of 10 cm from the plane mirror ?
(A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm
(C) 5 cm (D) 15 cm
Ans. (B) 20 cm
63. A virtual and enlarged image is formed by :
(A) concave mirror (B) convex mirror
(C) plane mirror (D) none of these
Ans. (A) concave mirror
64. An object is placed between focus and pole of concave mirror, image will be formed :
(A) at focus (B) at 2F/C
(C) behind the mirror (D) at infinity
Ans. (C) behind the mirror
65. When the object is placed at the focus of a concave mirror, image will be formed :
(A) at infinity (B) at 2F/C
(C) between F and C (D) beyond C
Ans. (A) at infinity
366 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

66. A virtual small sized image is formed by :

(A) concave mirror (B) convex mirror
(C) plane mirror (D) none of these
Ans. (B) convex mirror
67. An image is formed at 2F of a convex lens when the object is placed at :
(A) at F (B) at 2F
(C) between F, and 2F (D) at infinity
Ans. (B) at 2F
68. The bottom of a swimming pool appears to be raised due to :
(A) reflection (B) refraction
(C) diffraction (D) dispersal
Ans. (B) refraction
69. A convex lens forms the image of the sun :
(A) at F (B) between F and 2F
(C) at 2F (D) beyond 2F
Ans. (A) at F
70. Lens formula is :

(A) (B)

(C) (D) none of these

Ans. (C)
71. The image formed by a convex mirror is always :
(A) virtual (B) erect
(C) diminished in size (D) all of these
Ans. (D) all of these
72. The image of the sun formed by a concave mirror will be :
(A) at F (B) at 2F
(C) between F and 2F (D) at infinity
Ans. (A) at F
73. In concave mirror, we may not get the image on screen, if the object is placed :
(A) at F (B) at 2F
(C) between F and 2F (D) between F and pole
Ans. (D) between F and pole
74. In case of a concave mirror, a virtual, magnified, erect image can be obtained, if the object is placed :
(A) beyond 2F/C (B) at 2F/C
(C) at F (D) between F and P
Ans. (D) between F and P
75. The size of the object and image is always equal in :
(A) concave mirror (B) convex mirror
(C) plane mirror (D) none of these
Ans. (C) plane mirror
Light : Reflection and Refraction 367

76. Which of the following is an example of refraction ?

(A) A thick line on a sheet of paper appears to be bent at edges
(B) A coin at the bottom of a water filled bucket seem to be raised
(C) The rays of light bend when pass through a glass slab
(D) All of these
Ans. (D) All of these
77. A convex lens is forms erect and magnified image when the object is placed :
(A) at F (B) at 2F
(C) between F and O (D) between F and 2F
Ans. (C) between F and O
78. The negative sign of m shows that the image is :
(A) inverted (B) real
(C) (A) and (B) both (D) none of these
Ans. (C) (A) and (B) both
B. One Word/Sentence Questions
Q.1. What is light ?
Ans. Light is a form of energy which enables us to see objects.
Q.2. What is nature of light ?
Ans. Light behaves in two ways : (i) as electromagnetic radiations, (ii) as packets of energy.
Q.3. What is the name given to packets of energy ?
Ans. Photons.
Q.4. What makes things visible ?
Ans. Light makes things visible.
Q.5. State Quantum Theory of Light.
Ans. According to Quantum Theory of Light, ‘light is neither a wave nor a particle’.
Q.6. What is meant by defraction of light ?
Ans. The tendency of light to bend around an opaque object on its path, is called defraction of light.
Q.7. Define the term reflection of light.
Ans. When light falls on a smooth shiny surface it is reflected back into the same medium. This
phenomenon is termed as reflection of light.
Q.8. What is meant by refraction of light ?
Ans. When light enters from one medium into another medium, it changes its path or bends away from
its path, this phenomenon is called refraction of light.
Q.9. Why is light called indispensable tool ?
Ans. Because, without light we cannot explore the colourful, beautiful nature.
Q.10. Name two properties of light.
Ans. (i) Reflection, (ii) Refraction.
Q.11. What is the nature of light waves ?
Ans. Light waves are electromagnetic waves. These do not require any medium for their propagation.
368 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.12. What happens to the light which falls on a surface ?

Ans. (i) A part of it is reflected and refracted. (ii) A part of it is absorbed.
Q.13. What is a mirror ?
Ans. A smooth or highly polished surface which can reflect light is called a mirror.
Q.14. What are two main types of mirrors ?
Ans. (i) Plane mirrors, (ii) Spherical mirrors.
Q.15. Name the mirror which forms laterally inverted images.
Ans. Plane mirror forms laterally inverted images.
Q.16. What are spherical mirrors ?
Ans. The mirrors whose reflecting surfaces are spherical, are called spherical mirrors.
Q.17. Name two main types of spherical mirrors.
Ans. (i) Concave mirror, (ii) Convex mirror.
Q.18. What are concave mirrors ?
Ans. A spherical mirror, whose reflecting surface is curved inwards (that is faces towards the centre of
the sphere) is called concave mirror.
Q.19. What is a convex mirror ?
Ans. A spherical mirror whose reflecting surface is curved outwards, is called a convex mirror.
Q.20. What is the relationship between radius of curvature (R) and the focal length (f ) ?
Ans. Focal length (f ) is the half of radius of curvature (R).

f =
Q.21. Which laws are followed in the formation of images by spherical mirrors ?
Ans. Laws of reflection of light.
Q.22. What is meant by magnification ?
Ans. Magnification can be defined as the ratio of size of image formed to the size of the object.
Q.23. Give mathematical formula for magnification.
Ans. Magnification, (m) = where h is size of image, h is size of object.
Q.24. What does the negative sign of the magnification indicate ?
Ans. The negative sign in the value of the magnification indicates that the image is real.
Q.25. What does the positive sign in the value of the magnification indicate ?
Ans. It indicates that the image is virtual.
Q.26. Which side of the spoon can be approximated to a concave mirror and which side to convex
mirror ?
Ans. (i) The surface of spoon curved inwards can behave as a concave mirror.
(ii) The surface of spoon bulged ouwards can behave as a convex mirror.
Q.27. Are the laws of reflection followed by the rays reflected from spherical mirrors ?
Ans. Yes.
Q.28. If the aperture of the concave mirror is large then what happens to the image ?
Ans. (i) The image is not distinct.
(ii) It suffers from certain defects/distortions.
Q.29. Why are concave mirrors used as shaving mirrors ?
Ans. The concave mirror forms erect, virtual image which is highly magnified if the object is placed
between pole of mirror and its focus. It helps in shaving better.
Light : Reflection and Refraction 369

Q.30. Name the mirror that always produces a virtual, erect and small image of the object.
Ans. Convex mirror forms a virtual, erect and small image between pole (P) and the focus (f) of the mirror.
Q.31. Write one important use of convex mirrors.
Ans. Convex mirrors are used as rear-view mirrors in automobiles to see the traffic at the back side the vehicle.
Q.32. What is mirror formula ?
Ans. The relationship among object distance (u), image distance (v) and focal length (f) of the mirror, is
called mirror formula.
Q.33. Write mathematical form of mirror formula.

Ans. mirror formula : =

Q.34. How is magnification related to u and v ?
Ans. Magnification, (m) =
Q.35. What is the sign convention of magnification for convex mirror ?
Ans. Magnification is always positive (+), as the image formed is always virtual and erect.
Q.36. What is the sign convention of magnification for concave mirror ?
Ans. Magnification is positive for virtual image and magnification is negative for real image for a
concave mirror.
Q.37. What is the magnification produced by a plane mirror ?
Ans. The magnification produced by a plane mirror is always +1.
Q.38. What is meant by refraction of light ?
Ans. The bending of light when it moves from one transparent medium into another transparent medium
is called refraction of light.
Q.39. Does light always travel in straight line ?
Ans. Yes, if there is no obstraction on the way or if there is no change of medium.
Q.40. Does light travel with same speed in all the media ?
Ans. No, light travels with different speed in all the media.
Q.41. What is the cause of refraction ?
Ans. Change of speed of light when light passes from one medium into another medium is the cause of refraction.
Q.42. What is meant by refractive index ?
Ans. Refractive index may be defined as the ratio of speed of light in air/vacuum to the speed of light in
a medium.
Q.43. Give refractive index of water and glass with respect to air.
Ans. (i) Refractive index of water is 1.33.
(ii) Refractive index of glass is 1.52.
Q.44. Name the substance with highest refractive index.
Ans. Diamond has the highest refractive index.
Q.45. What is the refractive index of diamond ?
Ans. Refractive index of diamond is 2.42.
Q.46. What is a lens ?
Ans. A transparent material bound by two surfaces of which one or both surfaces are spherical, forms a lens.
Q.47. What is a convex lens ?
Ans. A lens which is thick in the middle (centre) and thinner at the edges. Or
A lens which converges light rays to a point, is called a convex lens.
370 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.48. What is a concave lens ?

Ans. A lens which is thin in the centre and thick at the edges, is called a concave lens. Or
A lens which diverges light rays is called a concave lens.
Q.49. Write lens formula.

Ans. =
Q.50. What is meant by power of a lens ?
Ans. The ability of a lens to converge or diverge light rays is called power of a lens. Or
The power of a lens is defined as the reciprocal of its focal length in metres.
Q.51. What is the unit of power of a lens ?
Ans. Dioptre.
Q.52. State two devices which use convex lens.
Ans. (i) Microscopes, (ii) Telescopes.
Q.53. Give mathematical formula for power.

Ans. P =

Q.54. If the focal length of a lens is 1 m. What will be its power ?

Ans. 1 D (Dioptre).
Q.55. If the power of a spherical lens is –2.5 D. What is the nature of lens and its focal length ?

Ans. P =

–2.5 =

f =
f = – 40 cm
The lens is concave.
Q.56. Give the formula for net power of lenses placed in contact with each other.
Ans. P = P1 + P2 + P3 + .........
Q.57. What happens to light when it enters from one transparent medium to another ?
Ans. It bends (refracts) from its path.
Q.58. When light enters from a rarer medium into denser medium, in which direction does it
bend ?
Ans. Light rays bend towards normal.
Q.59. What happens to light when it enters from denser medium into rarer medium ?
Ans. Light bends away from normal.
Q.60. What is dioptre ?
Ans. One dioptre is the power of a lens whose focal length is 1 metre.
Q.61. Why are a number of lenses combined in optical instruments ?
Ans. This is does so as to increase the magnification and resolution of image.
Q.62. Why do the opticians use the powers of lenses and not the focal lengths ?
Ans. To make the calculations easy and convenient.
Q.63. Name two optical instruments which make use of several lenses in contact.
Ans. (i) Telescopes, (ii) Microscopes.
Light : Reflection and Refraction 371

Q.64. If an optician places two lenses of power 2.0 D and + 0.25 D in front of a patient eye during
eye-testing. What is the power of the combined lenses ?
Ans. P = P1 + P2
= 2.0 + 0.25 = 2.25 D
Q.65. Why is it harmful to look at the sun through the lenses ?
Ans. Because it can damage our eyes.
Q.66. At what position we can get a sharp image of a distant object by using a convex lens ?
Ans. At the focus of the convex lens.
Q.67. What type of image is formed by a concave lens ?
Ans. A concave lens always forms a virtual, erect and small image.
Q.68. Define the term– centre of curvature.
Ans. The centre of the sphere of which lens forms a part, is called centre of curvature.
Q.69. What is meant by aperture of a spherical lens ?
Ans. The diameter of the sphere of which the lens forms a part, is called its aperture. OR
The effective diameter of the circular outline of a spherical lens is called its aperture.
Q.70. Define the term– principal focus of a convex lens.
Ans. The rays of light coming parallel to the principal axis, after refraction from a lens meet at a point
on the principal axis. This point is called principal focus.
Q.71. What is meant by focal length of a lens ?
Ans. The distance between optical centre and principal focus of a lens is called focal length of a lens.
Q.72. How is lateral displacement related to the thickness of the glass slab ?
Ans. Lateral displacement is proportional to the thickness of the glass slab.
Q.73. On what factors does the refractive index of the medium depends ?
Ans. It depends on optical density of medium and wavelength of light.
Q.74. Which of the medium have higher refractive index – optically rarer medium or optically
denser medium ?
Ans. Optically denser medium.
Q.75. What is meant by absolute refractive index ?
Ans. The ratio of speed of light in free space/vacuum to the speed of light in medium, is called absolute
refractive index.
Q.76. State Snell’s law.
Ans. The ratio of sin i and sin r is a constant for two sets of media. This ratio is also called the refractive
index of the second medium with respect to the first.

= n21

Q.77. Why is refraction not noticable through glass window panes ?

Ans. Because, the window panes are usually thin. The bend in path of light rays is not noticeable.
Q.78. In what condition does refraction of light not take place ?
Ans. When the incident rays are perpendicular to the surface of transparent medium, then refraction
does not take place.
Q.79. Give one example of refraction.
Ans. An ink dot appears raised when viewed under a glass slab.
Q.80. Why does refraction occur ?
Ans. Refraction occurs because light rays travel with different velocities/speeds in different media.
372 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

II. Short-Answer Type Questions

Q.1. What is light ? What is ray of light ?
Ans. Light : That form of energy which does not visible to us but helps to make visible the other things,
is called light.
Ray of light : The line alongwith the light travels is called ray of light. The ray of light is indicated by
an arrow sign.
Q.2. Enlist four different phenomena associated with light.
Ans. Four different phenomena associated with light are :
(i) Twinkling of stars
(ii) Blue colour of sky
(iii) Beautiful colours of rainbow
(iv) Image formation by mirrors and lenses.
Q.3. Differentiate between transparent and opaque media.
Ans. Differences between transparent and opaque media are :
Transparent media Opaque media

(i) The media through which light can pass (i) The media through which light cannot
easily, are called transparent media. pass easily, are called opaque media.
(ii) Refraction of light takes place through them. (ii) Reflection and absorption of light
takes place by them.
(iii) We can see across them. (iii) We cannot see across them.
Examples : Glass, water, air. Examples : Wood, metals, oily paper,
butter paper.
Q.4. What is nature of light ?
Ans. (i) Light is thought of as a wave. It is electromagnetic in nature.
(ii) Light also behave somewhat like a stream of particles.
Q.5. What is light in accordance with the Quantum Theory of Light ?
Ans. According to Quantum Theory of Light, light is neither a ‘wave’ nor a ‘particle’. This theory
reconciles (combine) the particle properties of light with the wave nature.
Q.6. What is diffraction of light ?
Ans. If an opaque objects on the path of light becomes very small, light has a tendency to bend towards
its edges, this effect is known as diffraction of light. To explain the phenomena of diffraction, light is thought
of as a wave.
Q.7. Define reflection of light and refraction of light.
Ans. Reflection of light : When a ray of light falls on a polished smooth surface (mirror), it returns
back into the same medium, this is called reflection of light.
Refraction of light : When light enters from one transparent medium into another transparent medium,
it changes its original path, is called refraction of light.
Light : Reflection and Refraction 373

Q.8. Differentiate between reflection and refraction of light.

Ans. Differences between reflection and refraction of light are :
Reflection of light Refraction of light
(i) The coming back of light into the same (i) The transmission of light through a
medium after striking a polished surface transparent medium into other medium
such as mirror, is called reflection of light. and change of its path is called refraction
of light.
(ii) There occur no change in speed of light. (ii) It occurs due to change in speed of light.
(iii) It does not require a set of two media. (iii) It requires a set of two transparent
media with different optical densities.
Q.9. State the laws of reflection.
Ans. The laws of reflection are :
(i) The incident ray, the reflected ray and the normal, all lie in the same plane at the point of incidence.
(ii) The angle of incidence is equal to the angle of reflection.
i = r
N

Incident ray i r Reflected ray

A M B
Normal
Fig. 10.4

Q.10. Enlist the properties of images formed by a plane mirror.

Ans. The properties of images formed by a plane mirror are :
(i) The image formed is always virtual.
(ii) The image formed is always erect.
(iii) The image formed is always equal in size to the object.
(iv) The image formed is always at a distance equal to the distance of object from the mirror.
(v) The image formed is laterally inverted.
Q.11. What are spherical mirrors ? How many types are these ?
Ans. Spherical mirrors : The mirrors which have curved reflecting surfaces are called spherical mirrors.
The curved surface of a shining spoon is an example of spherical mirror.
Spherical mirrors are of two types :
(i) Convex spherical mirrors (ii) Concave spherical mirrors.
Q.12. (a) Show the path of an incident ray when it
falls perpendicular to the mirror.
(b) Give the value of i and r.
Incident ray
Ans. (a)
Reflected ray
(b) i = 0°
Mirror
r = 0°
Fig. 10.5
374 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.13. Differentiate between a convex mirror and a concave mirror.

Ans. Differences between a convex mirror and a concave mirror are :
Convex mirror Concave mirror
(i) A spherical mirror whose reflecting (i) A spherical mirror whose reflecting
surface is curved outward, is called surface is curved inwards, is called
a convex mirror. a concave mirror.
(ii) It always forms virtual image. (ii) It mostly forms real images
except when the object is placed
in between focus and poles.
(iii) It diverges the rays of light. (iii) It converges the rays of light.
Q.14. How does image formation take place ? Or
Which of the rays should be considered for locating the image ?
Ans. The intersection of at least two reflected rays gives the position of the image of the point object.
Any two of the following rays can be considered for locating the image :
(i) A ray parallel to the principal axis, will pass through the principal focus in case of a concave mirror.
It will appear to diverge from principal focus in case of convex mirror.

C F F C

Fig. 10.6
(ii) A ray passing through the principal focus after
reflection will become parallel to the principal axis.

C F

Fig. 10.7

(iii) A ray passing through the centre of curvature of

a concave mirror will come back along the same path after
reflection.
C F

(iv) The incident and reflected rays will follow the

laws of reflection.
Fig. 10.8
Light : Reflection and Refraction 375

Q.15. Enlist four uses of concave mirrors.

Ans. Uses of concave mirrors are :
(i) They are used as reflectors in torches, search-lights and vehicle headlights to get powerful parallel
beam of light.
(ii) Large concave mirrors are used to concentrate sunlight to produce heat in solar furnaces.
(iii) They are often used as shaving mirrors.
(iv) They are used by ENT surgeons and dentists to observe body parts.
Q.16. Draw ray diagram for formation of image by convex mirrors.
Ans.
M

P F C

M
B i
At infinity A r
N
(a) A

B P B F C
(b)

N
Fig. 10.9 : Formation of image by a convex mirror

Q.17. Enlist the properties of image formed by a convex mirror.

Ans. Properties of image formed by a convex mirror are :
(i) The image formed is small in size.
(ii) The image formed is virtual.
(iii) The image formed is erect.
(iv) Image is always formed between pole and focus of the mirror.
Q.18. Enlist two uses of convex mirrors.
Ans. Uses of convex mirrors are :
(i) They are commonly used as rear-view mirrors in vehicles.
(ii) They are used in microscopes as reflector.
Q.19. Why are convex (and not concave) mirrors fitted on the side of vehicles ?
Ans. (i) Because it enables the driver to see traffic behind him to facilitate safe driving.
(ii) They always give a diminished erect image.
(iii) They have a wider field of view as they are curved outwards.
All this will not be possible with a concave or plane mirror.
376 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.20. What are the differences between images formed by the concave and convex mirrors ?
Ans. Differences between images formed by the concave and convex mirrors are following :
Images formed by concave mirror Images formed by convex mirror

(i) The images formed by a concave mirror are (i) The images formed by a convex mirror
mostly real. are always virtual.
(ii) Magnified real or virtual images can be (ii) The images formed are always erect
obtained. and diminished in size.
(iii) Mostly images are formed on the same side (iii) Images are formed behind the mirror only.
of the object.
Q.21. Enlist New Cartesian Sign Conventions used for reflection by spherical mirrors.
Ans. The New Cartesian Sign Conventions are :
(i) The object is always placed to the left of the mirror.
(ii) All distances parallel to the principal axis are measured from the pole of the mirror.
(iii) The distances measured in the direction of light rays are taken as positive while those measured
against the direction of incident rays are taken as negative.
(iv) Distances measured perpendicular to and above the principal axis are taken as positive.
(v) Distances measured perpendicular to and below the principal axis are taken as negative.
M
Object on the left
Direction of
incident light
Height upwards
Distance towards Distance towards
(+ve)
the left (–ve) P the right (+ve)
X X
B B
Height
downwards (–ve)

Mirror
A
N

Fig. 10.10 : The New Cartesian Sign Convention for spherical mirrors

Q.22. Write mirror formula. What does u, v and f stands for in the formula ?
Ans. The mirror formula is :

Where
(i) u is the distance of object from the pole of the mirror.
(ii) v is the distance of image from pole of the mirror.
(iii) f is the focal length of the mirror.
Q.23. What does the positive (+) and negative (–) sign of the magnification indicate ?
Ans. (i) The negative sign (–) in the value of the magnification indicates that the image is real.
(ii) The positive sign (+) in the value of the magnification indicates that the image is virtual.
Q.24. What is meant by magnification ? How are u, v, h and h related to it ?
Ans. Magnification (m) : It is the ratio of the size of image produced to the size of the object.
Light : Reflection and Refraction 377

If h is the height of the object and his the height of the image, then magnification m produced by a
spherical mirror is given by :

m =

m =
Magnification (m) is also related to the object distance (u) and image distance (v).
It can be written as :
Magnification (m) =
Q.25. What is the relation between the focal length (f ) and radius of curvature (R) ?
Ans. Focal length is half of radius of curvature.

f =

Q.26. Draw only ray diagrams to show image formation by (a) convex mirror, (b) concave mirror,
when the object is placed at infinity.
Ans.
G
M r M
A A i
i D
r
D
E
At infinity

At infinity

P
C P F C
F

B B
N N
(a) Concave mirror (b) Convex mirror

Fig. 10.11 : (a) Concave mirror, (b) Convex mirror

Q.27. Prepare a table showing position of object, position of image, size of image and nature of the
image. When a concave mirror forms images for different positions of the object.
Ans. Table : Image formation by a concave mirror for different positions of the object
Position of the Position of the Size of the Nature of the
object image image image
At infinity At the focus F Highly diminished, Real and inverted
point-sized
Beyond C [2017] Between F and C Diminished Real and inverted
At C [2019 (Set-B)] At C Same size Real and inverted
Between C and F Beyond C Enlarged [2019 (Set-D)] Real and inverted
At F At infinity Highly enlarged Real and inverted
Between P and F Behind the mirror Enlarged Virtual and erect
378 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.28. Tabulate the nature, position and relative size of the image formed by a convex mirror.
Ans. Table : Nature, position and relative size of the image formed by a convex mirror
Position of the object Position of the image Size of the image Nature of the image
At infinity At the focus F, Highly diminished, Virtual and erect
behind the mirror point-sized
Between infinity and Between P and F, Diminished Virtual and erect
the pole P of the mirror behind the mirror

Q.29. State two characteristics of image formed by a convex mirror.

Ans. (i) The image formed is always virtual, erect and small in size.
(ii) Image is always formed behind the mirror between pole (P) and focus (f ) of the mirror.
Q.30. Enlist four common phenomena due to refraction of light.
Ans. Common phenomena due to refraction of light are :
(i) The bottom of a tank/pond containing water appears to be raised.
(ii) When a thick glass slab is placed over some printed matter, the letters appear raised when viewed
through glass slab.
(iii) A pencil partly immersed in water, appears to be displaced at the interface of air and water.
(iv) A lemon kept in water in a glass tumbler appears to be bigger than its actual size when viewed
from sides.
Q.31. Draw the path of light through a rectangular glass slab.
Ans.

Q.32. State the two laws of refraction.

Ans. The two laws of refraction are :
(i) The incident ray, the refracted ray and normal to the surface of separation of two transparent media
at the point of incidence, all lie in the same plane.
(ii) The ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the sine of angle of refraction, is a constant, for the light of
a given colour and for the given pair of media.
This law is also known as Snell’s law of refraction.

= constant.
Light : Reflection and Refraction 379

Q.33. Give mathematical formulae to calculate the refractive index. How is it calculated ?
Ans. Refractive index is defined as the ratio of speed of light in vacuum/air to the speed of light in a
medium.

nm =

Absolute refractive index, nm =

Refractive index of medium 2, n21 =

v2
Refractive index of medium 1, n12 = = v
1

Q.34. Differentiate between concave and convex lanses.

Ans. Following are the differences between concave and convex lenses :
Convex lens Concave lens
(i) This lens is thicker at the centre and (i) This lens is thinner at the centre and
thinner at the edges. thicker at the edges.
(ii) It converges light rays to a point, so (ii) It diverges the rays of light, so is called a
is called a converging lens. diverging lens.
(iii) It mostly forms real and inverted images. (iii) It only forms virtual and erect images.
(iv) It can be used as a magnifying lens. (iv) It cannot be used as a magnifying lens.

Q.35. Define the following terms with respect to a lens :

Centre of curvature, optical centre, principal axis.
Ans. Centre of curvature : The centre of the spheres whose lens is a part, is called centre of curvature.
Optical centre : Centre of the lens, the rays of light passing through which do not deviate from their
path, is called optical centre.
Principal axis : The imaginary line joining the optical centre and the centre of curvature is called
principal axis.
Q.36. Define the terms w.r.t. lens : Principal focus, focal length and aperture.
Ans. Principal focus : The rays of light coming parallel to the principal axis meet (or seems to diverge)
at a point on the principal axis, this point is called principal focus.
Focal length : The distance between principal focus and the optical centre of the lens, is called focal
length of the lens.
Aperture : The effective diameter of the circular outline of a spherical lens, is called its aperture.
Q.37. Differentiate between principal focus of a convex lens and a concave lens.
Ans. Principal focus of convex lens : The light rays parallel to the principal axis falling on a concave
lens, after refraction from the lens, converge to a point on principal axis. This point on the principal axis is
called principal focus of a convex lens.
Principal focus of concave lens : The rays of light parallel to the principal axis when fall on a concave
lens, after refraction from the lens, appears to diverge from a point on the principal axis. This point on principal
axis is called the principal focus of a concave lens.
Note that a lens has two principal focus.
380 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

C1
O
2F1 F1 O F2 F1
2F1

(b)
(a) N

Fig. 10.13

Q.38. How will you find the approximate focal length of a convex lens ?
Ans. Hold the convex lens in one hand and try to get a clear image of a distant object on a paper or wall.
Note the distance between the lens and the paper/wall. Repeat the activity and note the distance carefully.
Find the average of all readings.
This is the approximate focal length of the given lens.
Q.39. How does image formation take place by a convex lens ?
Ans. Image formation in lenses (convex lens).
(i) A ray of light from the object, parallel to the principal axis, after refraction from a convex lens,
passes through the principal focus on the other side of the lens.

O
F F2

Fig. 10.14

(ii) A ray of light passing through the principal focus,

after refraction from the lens become parallel to the principal
axis. O
F1 F2

Fig. 10.15

(iii) A ray of light passing through the optical centre

of a lens will emerge without any deviation.

(iv) Image is formed where there rays of light from

the object meet. Fig. 10.16
Light : Reflection and Refraction 381

Q.40. Draw ray diagram for the image formation by a concave lens. Also write the characteristics
of the image formed.
Ans.

M A M

A

2F1 F1 O 2F1 B F1 B O

(a) N (b) N

Fig. 10.17 : Nature, position and relative size of the image formed by a concave lens

Characteristics of image formed are : (i) The image formed is always virtual.
(ii) The image formed is always erect.
(iii) The image formed is always between focus and optical centre of lens.
Q.41. Enlist sign conventions for spherical lenses.
Ans. The sign conventions of spherical lenses are same as that of spherical mirrors as given in Q. 21.
(i) All measurements are taken from the optical centre of the lens.
(ii) The focal length of a convex lens is positive and that of a concave lens is negative.
) indicate ?
Q.42. What does the negative sign of magnification (m) and height of image (h
Ans. The negative sign of m and hindicates :
(i) that the image is inverted.
(ii) that the image is real.
(iii) that the image is formed below the principal axis.
Q.43. Tabulate the nature, position and relative size of the image formed by a concave lens for
various positions of the object.
Ans. Table : Nature, position and relative size of the image formed by a concave lens for various
positions of the object
Position of the object Position of the image Relative size of the image Nature of the image
At infinity At focus F1 Highly diminished, Virtual and erect
point-sized
Between infinity and Between focus F1 and Diminished Virtual and erect
lens optical centre O optical centre O optical centre O
Q.44. What is meant by power of a lens ? What is its SI unit ? Write its mathematical formula.
Ans. Power of a lens : The power of a lens is defined as the reciprocal of its focal length. It is the ability
of the lens to converge or diverge the light rays. The power of a convex lens is positive and that of a concave
lens is negative. [H.B.S.E. March,2018 (Set-A,B,C,D), 2019 (Set-C)]
The SI unit of power of a lens is Dioptres.
Power P =

where f (m) is focal length of the lens in metres.

382 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.45. Enlist the characteristics of the light rays after refraction through a glass slab.
Ans. The characteristics of the light rays after refraction are :
(i) When the light rays travel from a rarer medium (air) to a denser medium (glass) it bends towards
the normal and vice-versa.
(ii) There is no change in the path of light rays when they fall in normal position that is why the angle
of incidence is zero.
(iii) The incident ray and the emergent rays are parallel to each other.
(iv) The lateral displacement increases with the increase in angle of incidence and increase in the
thickness of the glass slab.
Q.46. What will be the value of (i) angle of incidence and (ii) angle of refraction for a normal
incidence ?
Ans. (i) Angle of incidence will be zero (0°) as the path of the normal and incidence ray will be same.
(ii) The value of angle of refraction will also be zero (0°) as the ray of light will not refract and its path
will be same as that of the normal.

Incident ray
Medium 1

Normal
Medium 2
Refracted ray

Fig. 10.18

III. Essay-Type Questions

Q.1. Define the following terms for a concave (spherical) mirrors : Pole, centre of curvature,
radius of curvature, aperture, principal axis, principal focus, focal length.
Ans. Pole : The centre of the reflecting surface of a spherical mirror is a point called the pole.
Centre of curvature : The reflecting surface of a spherical mirror forms a part of a sphere. The centre
of this sphere is called centre of curvature.
Radius of curvature : The radius of the sphere of which the reflecting surface of a spherical mirror
forms a part, is called radius of curvature.
Aperture : The diameter of the reflecting surface of spherical mirror is called its aperture.
Principal axis : An imaginary straight line passing through the pole and centre of curvature of a spherical
mirror, is called principal axis.
Principal focus : The rays of light coming parallel to the principal axis, after reflection from the concave
mirror meet at a point on the principal axis, this point is called principal focus.
Focal length : The distance between the focus and the pole of the mirror is called focal length.
Light : Reflection and Refraction 383

Q.2. Draw ray diagrams for image formation by a concave mirror, for fine positions of the object.
Ans. [H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-C, D)]
M M
A A
D
i
r

At infinity B
P P
C F B C F
A

B D
(a) N N
(b) M
M E
A D
A
D
B C B P
B F
P
B C F

E A (d) N
A
N [H.B.S.E. 2019 (Set-D)]
(c) M A
M
E E

A A
D
C B P C i
F F B r P B
(e)
At infinity (f)
[H.B.S.E. 2018 (Set-A,C), 2019 (Set-B)] N N
Fig. 10.19 : Ray diagrams for the image formation by a concave mirror

(a) When the object is at infinity. (b) When the object is beyond C.
(c) When the object is at C. (d) When the object is between F and C.
(e) When the object is at F. (f ) When the object is between F and P. [Sample Paper, 2019]
Q.3. Draw ray diagrams for image formation by a convex lens for different positions of the object.
Ans. [H.B.S.E. 2017(Set-A, B)]

M A M
C

C1 C2 C1 B C2
2F1 F1 O F2 2F2 B 2F1 F1 O F2 2F2

A
N N
f
(a) u v
(b)
384 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

M
A

M 2F2
C1 B
A
2F1 B F1 O F2 C2

B C1 O 2F2
2F1 F1 F2 C2 B (d)
N

A
(c) A
N
M
A

B 2F2
2F1 F1 O F2 C2
C1

(e) N
A

2F2
O
B 2F1 F1 B F2 C2
C1

(f)
[H.B.S.E. March, 2018 (Set-B,D), 2019 (Set-C)] N

Fig. 10.20 : The position, size and the nature of the image formed by a convex lens for various positions of the object

(a) When the object is at infinity. (b) When the object is beyond 2F or C.
(c) When the object is at C or 2F. (d) When the object is between C and F.
(e) When the object is at F. (f ) When the object is between F and O.
Q.4. Tabulate the nature, position and relative size of the image formed by a convex lens for
various positions of the object.
Ans. Table : Nature, position and relative size of the image formed by a convex lens for various positions
of the object
Position of the object Position of the image Relative size of the image Nature of the image

At infinity At focus F2 Highly diminished, Real and inverted

point-sized

Beyond 2F1 [2017] Between F2 and 2F2 Diminished Real and inverted

At 2F1 At 2F2 Same size Real and inverted

cont...
Light : Reflection and Refraction 385

Position of the object Position of the image Relative size of the image Nature of the image
Between F1 and 2F1 Beyond 2F2 [2017] Enlarged [2019 (Set-A)] Real and inverted

At focus F1 At infinity Infinitely large or highly Real and inverted

enlarged
Between focus F1 On the same side of Enlarged [2019 (Set-C)] Virtual and erect
and optical centre O the lens as the object

Q.5. How are the refractive indices of two media related to each other ?
Ans. Suppose, the refractive index of medium 1 is n1, the refractive index of medium 2 is n2.
v1 be the speed of light in medium 1.
v2 be the speed of light in medium 2.
n1 =

or v1 =

n2 =

or v2 =

According to Snell’s law (Second law of refraction)

= n21

or n21 =

n21 =

n21 =

Here n21 is the refractive index of the medium 2 with respect to medium 1.
Important Table

Material medium Refractive index Material medium Refractive index

Air 1.0003 Canada Balsam 1.53
Ice 1.31 Rock salt 1.54
Water 1.33 Carbon disulphide 1.63
Alcohol 1.36 Dense flint glass 1.65
cont...
386 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Material medium Refractive index Material medium Refractive index

Kerosene 1.44 Ruby 1.71
Fused quartz 1.46 Sapphire 1.77
Turpentine oil 1.47 Diamond 2.42
Benzene 1.50
Crown glass 1.52

IV. Numerical Questions

IMPORTANT FORMULAE

(i) Mirror formula =

(ii) Mirror magnification (m) =

(iii) f =

(iv) Magnification, n21 =

(v) Magnification (n) =

(with respect to vacuum)

(vi) n32 = n31 × n12 =

(vii) Lens formula =

(viii) Lens magnification (m) =

(ix) Power of lens (P) =

(x) Total Power (P) = P1 + P2 + P3 + ............

Light : Reflection and Refraction 387

A. Numericals from Text Book

Problem 1. A convex mirror used for rear-view on an automobile has a radius of curvature of 3.00
m. If a bus is located at 5.00 m from this mirror, find the position, nature and size of the image.
Solution : Radius of curvature (R) = + 3.00 m ;
Object-distance (u) = – 5.00 m ;
Image-distance (v) = ?
Height of the image (h) = ?

Focal length (f ) = R/2 =

According to mirror formula : =

1 1 1 1 1 1
or = – = + 1.50 – (–5.00) = 
f u 1.50 5.00

5.00 + 1.50
=
7.50

v = = + 1.15 m

The image is 1.15 m at the back of the mirror.

Magnification (m) =
= + 0.23
The image is virtual, erect and smaller in size by a factor of 0.23.
Problem 2. An object, 4.0 cm in size, is placed at 25.0 cm in front of a concave mirror of focal
length 15.0 cm. At what distance from the mirror should a screen be placed in order to obtain a sharp
image ? Find the nature and the size of the image.
Solution : Object-size (h) = + 4.0 cm;
Object-distance (u) = –25.0 cm;
Focal length (f ) = –15.0 cm;
Image-distance (v) = ?
Image-size (h) = ?
According to mirror formula :

or, =

or, = or, v = –37.5 cm

The screen should be placed at 37.5 cm from the mirror. The image is real.
388 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Now, magnification, (m) =

or, (h) =

Height of the image, (h) = – 6.0 cm

The image is inverted and enlarged.
Problem 3. A concave lens has focal length of 15 cm. At what distance should the object from the
lens be placed so that it forms an image at 10 cm from the lens ? Also, find the magnification produced
by the lens.
Solution : Here, A concave lens always forms a virtual, erect image on the same side of the object.
Image-distance (v) = –10 cm ;
Focal length (f ) = – 15 cm ;
Object-distance (u) = ?

According to lens formula : =

or, =

–
=

or, u = – 30 cm
Thus, the object distance is 30 cm.
Magnification, (m) = v/u

(m) =

The positive sign shows that the image is erect and virtual. The image is one-third of the size of the object.
Problem 4. A 2.0 cm tall object is placed perpendicular to the principal axis of a convex lens of
focal length 10 cm. The distance of the object from the lens is 15 cm. Find the nature, position and size
of the image. Also, find its magnification.
Solution : Height of the object (h) = + 2.0 cm ;
Focal length (f ) = + 10 cm ;
Object-distance (u) = – 15 cm ;
Image-distance (v) = ?
Height of the image (h) = ?

According to lens Formula, =

or, =
Light : Reflection and Refraction 389

or, v = + 30 cm
The positive sign of vshows that the image is formed at a distance of 30 cm on the other side of the
optical centre. The image is real and inverted.

Magnification (m) =

or, (h) = h (vu)

Height of the image (h) = (2.0) (+30/–15) = – 4.0 cm
Magnification (m) = v/u

or, m = = –2

The negative signs of m and h show that the image is inverted and real. It is formed below the principal
axis. Thus, a real, inverted image, 4 cm tall, is formed at a distance of 30 cm on the other side of the lens. The
image is two times enlarged.

B. OTHER IMPORTANT NUMERICALS

Q.1. A convex mirror used on an automobile has 3.00 m radius of curvature. If a bus is located at
5.00 m from this mirror, find the position, nature and size of the image.
Sol. Here,
Radius of curvature (R) = + 3.00 m
Object-distance (u) = –5.00 m
Image-distance (v) = ?
Image-size (h) = ?

Focal length,(f ) = R/2 = + = + 1.50 m

According to mirror formula :

1 1 1 1 1 1 1
or  –    
v f u 1.50 5.00 1.50 5.00

5.00  150
. 6.50
= 
7.50 7.50
7.50
v = = +1.15 m
6.50

The image is 1.15 m at the back of the mirror. Magnification, (m) = = +0.23

 h = +0.23 h
The image is virtual, upright and smaller in size by a factor of 0.23 (about one-fourth) than the object.
390 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.2. An object, 4.0 cm in size, is placed 25.0 cm in front of a concave mirror of focal length
15.0 cm. At what distance from the mirror should a screen be placed in order to obtain a sharp image ?
Find the nature and the size of the image.
Sol. Here, object-size (h) = + 4.0 cm
Object-distance (u) = –25.0 cm
Focal length (f ) = – 15.0 cm
Image-distance (v) = ?
Image-size (h) = ?

1 1 1
According to mirror formula : = –
v f u

1 1 1 1
=   
15 25 15 25
5  3 2
=  Or
75 75
75
 v = = –37.5 cm
2
The screen should be placed at 37.5 cm from the mirror on the object side of the mirror. Image is real.

Also, Magnification (m) =

or h =

Therefore, Image-size, h = – 6.0 cm

The image is inverted and enlarged in size.

Q.3. A candle has been placed 3 cm away from a concave mirror, whose radius of curvature is
24 cm. Find the position, size and nature of the object.
Sol. Here,
Radius of curvature (R) = –24 cm

Focal length (f ) =

Distance of object (u) = –3 cm

Distance of image (v) = ?
Size of image (h) = ?
According to mirror formula :

1 1 1
or = –
v f u
1 1
= 
12 3
Light : Reflection and Refraction 391

1 1 1  4
=  
12 3 12

3 1
= 
12 4
 v = 4 cm
Image will be formed on the back of mirror at a distance of 4 cm.

Magnification (m) =

 h = 1.33 h
The image formed will be virtual, upright and magnified by 1.33 times the object size.
Q.4. How far an object should be placed from a concave mirror of focal length 40 cm, so that the
image formed is double the size of the object ?
Sol.Here, focal length (f ) = – 40 cm
Magnification (m) = 2
(i) For a real image

m =

2 =

v = 2u
According to mirror formula :

or =

or =

or 2u = –120

or u = = – 60 cm

Therefore, to obtain real image, the object will be placed at a distance of 60 cm.
(ii) For virtual image

m =

2 =

or v = – 2u
392 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

According to mirror formula :

or = –

or = – or =– or 2u = – 40

or u = – 20 cm
Therefore, the object be placed at a distance of 20 cm.
Q.5. Dentist make use of small sized concave mirrors. If a concave mirror of focal length 3 cm is
placed at a distance of 2 cm from a tooth, then what will be the magnification of the image ?
Sol. Here,
Focal legnth (f ) = –3 cm
Distance of object (u) = – 2 cm
According to mirror formula :

 =

or =

or = or =

v = 6 cm

Magnification =
Therefore, the image will be magnified 3 times.
Q.6. Describe the size, nature and position of the image if an object has been placed at a distance
of 15 cm from concave mirror of 10 cm focal length.
Sol. Here, F ocal length (f ) = – 10 cm
Distance of object (u) = – 15 cm
Distance of image (v) = ?
Size of image (h) = ?
According to mirror formula :
1 1 1
+ =
v u f
1 1 1
or = –
v f u
1 1 1
or = 
v 10 15
Light : Reflection and Refraction 393

1 1 –3 + 2
= – + =
10 15 30
–1
=
30
v = –30 cm
Therefore, the image will be formed on the side of the object at a distance of 30 cm.

Also, Magnification (m) = = –2

or h = –2 h
Therefore, the image will be real, inverted and enlarged two times than the object.
Q.7. A concave mirror forms an image 2.0 cm high of an object of 0.5 cm height. If the object has
been placed at a distance of 10 cm, then find the position of image and focal length of the mirror.
Sol. Here, Height of object (h) = 0.5 cm
Height of image (h) = 2.0 cm
Distance of object (u) = – 10 cm
Distance of image (v) = ?
Focal length of mirror (f ) = ?
According to mirror magnification :

m =

or =

or 4 =

or v = 40 cm
That is, the image will be formed at a distance of 40 cm.
According to mirror formula :

or =

or =

or =

or f = = –13.3 cm (about)

Focal length of the mirror is 13.3 cm.

394 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Q.8. An object is placed at a distance of 10 cm from a convex mirror of 20 cm focal length. Find
the position and nature of the image.
Sol. Here,
Focal length of the mirror (f ) = + 20 cm
Distance of object (u) = – 10 cm
Distance of image (v) = ?
According to mirror formula :

or =

v = = 6.66 cm

So, the image will be formed at a distance of 6.66 cm on the back of the mirror

Magnification m =

 h = 0.66 h
Therefore, the image will be virtual, upright and will be 0.66 times the size of the object (smaller than
the object).
Q.9. An object of 5 cm height has been placed at a distance of 10 cm from a convex mirror of 30
cm radius of curvature. Find the position, size and nature of the image.
Sol. Here, radius of curvature (R) = + 30 cm

Focal length (f ) =

Distance of object (u) = – 10 cm

Height of object (h) = 5 cm
Distance of image (v) = ?
Height of image (h) = ?
According to mirror formula :

or =

 v = 6 cm
Light : Reflection and Refraction 395

Therefore, the image will be formed at a distance of 6 cm behind the mirror.

Now, magnification (m) =

or =

h =

So, the image formed will be virtual, erect and of 3 cm height.

Q.10.The image of an object placed at a distance of 40 cm is formed 10 cm away from the convex
mirror. Find the focal length of the mirror.
Sol. Here, distance of object (u) = – 40 cm
Distance of image (v) = 10 cm
Focal length (f ) = ?
According to mirror formula :

or =

f = = 13.3 cm

So, the focal length of the convex lens will be 13.3 cm.

4 3
Q.11. If the refractive index of water with respect to air is and refractive index of glass is
3 2
Then, what is the value of refractive index of glass with respect to water ?
Sol. Here,
Refractive index of air, n1 = 1
Refractive index of water with respect to air

n21 = n2 =
Refractive index of glass with respect to air

n31 = n3 =
Refractive index of glass with respect to water

n32 =
396 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

n32 =

Therefore, refractive index of glass with respect to water is = 1.12.

Q.12. The speed of light in vacuum and a transparent medium is 3 × 108 m/s and 2.4 × 108 m/s
respectively. Find the refractive index of the medium.
Sol. Here,
Speed of light of vacuum, (c) = 3 × 108 m/s
Speed of light in transparent medium (v) = 2.4 × 108 m/s
Refractive index of medium (n) = ?

We know that n =

n =

n = 1.25
Q.13. The refractive index of a medium with respect to vacuum is 1.3. The speed of light in vacuum
is 3 × 108 m/s. Find the speed of light in the medium.
Sol. Here,
Refractive index of medium (n) = 1.3
Speed of light in vacuum (c) = 3 × 108 m/s
Speed of light in medium (v) = ?

We know that, n =

v =

So, the speed of light in the given medium is 2.3 × 108 m/s.

Q.14. The refractive index of water respect to air is 4/3. Find the refractive index of air with
respect to water.
Sol. Here,
Refractive index of water with respect to air,
an =
w

Refractive index of air with respect to water,

wn = ?
a

We know that, an =
w

wn =
a
Light : Reflection and Refraction 397

Q.15. What is the value of critical angle for glass air, if the refractive index of glass with respect to
air is 1.5 ?
Sol. Here,
Refractive index of glass with respect to air
an = 1.5
g
Critical angle (ic) = ?
We know that

an =
g

 1.5 =

or sin ic = = 0.67 = sin 42°

 ic = 42°
So, the critical angle for glass-air will be 42°.

Q.16. A convex lens magnifies an object five times. If the object is displaced 3 cm backwards,
then, magnification remains just 2 times. Find the focal length of the lens and the first position of the
object.
Sol. Here, Magnification (m) = 5

 = 5
v = 5u
For real image magnification will be positive so,
v = + 5u
According to lens formula,

or =

or f = ...(i)

If the object is displaced 3 cm backwards

Then, distance of object (u) = u + 3
Magnification (m) = 2

 = 2 or v = 2 (u + 3)

Again, according to lens formula,

= =
398 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

or f = ...(ii)

Comparing equations (i) and (ii)

or 15u = 12u + 36
15u – 12u = 36
3u = 36
u = 12 cm
Putting value of u in equation (i)

f = = 10 cm

So, the focal length of the lens is 10 cm and initial position of object is 12 cm from the optical centre of
lens.
Q.17. An object has been placed at a distance of 8 cm from a concave lens of 5 cm focal length.
Find the position of the image.
Sol. Here, focal length (f ) = – 5 cm
Distance of object (u) = – 8 cm
Distance of image (v) = ?

According to lens formula, =

or =

= = =

or v = = – 3.07 cm

Therefore, the distance of the image from the lens will be 3.07 cm.
Q.18. There is a convex lens of 15 cm focal length. To obtain double magnification, how far the
object be placed from it ?
Sol. Here, Magnification (m) = 2
Focal length (f ) = + 15 cm
Distance of object (u) = ?
We know that, m =
Light : Reflection and Refraction 399

 2 =

or v = 2u
The image formed by a convex lens can be real or virtual.
(i) If the image formed is virtual, then, will be negative
 v = – 2u

According to lens formula, =

= = =

or 2u = 15

u =

(ii) If the image formed is real, then v will be positive.

 v = 2u

According to lens formula, =

or 2u = 45

u = = 22.5 cm

Q.19. An object of 5 cm height is placed at a distance of 25 cm from a convex lens of 10 cm focal

length. Find the position and size of the image.
Sol. Here, distance of object (u) = –25 cm
Focal length (f ) = 10 cm
Size/Height of object (h) = 5 cm
Height of image (h) = ?
Distance of image (v) = ?

According to lens formula, =

or = = =

 v = = 16.67 cm

Magnification (m) =
400 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

 =

or h = = – 3.33 cm

So, the image will be formed at a distance of 16.67 cm and will be real, inverted and enlarged by 3.33
times the size of the object.
Q.20. The distance between an object and a screen is 48 cm. If a convex lens is placed between the
object and the screen, then image formed is 3 times larger than the object. Find the focal length of the
lens.
Sol. Here, Magnification (m) = 3 cm

 = 3
or v = 3u
According to statement, u + v = 48 cm
or u + 3u = 48
4u = 48

or u = – = –12 cm

 v = 3 × 12 = 36 cm

According to lens formula, = =

 f = + 9 cm
Therefore, focal length of the lens = 9 cm.
Q.21. The power of a lens is + 0.5 D. What is its nature and focal length ?
Sol. Here, power of lens (P) = + 0.5 D
Focal length, (f ) = ?

We know that, P =

or f =

The positive sign indicates that the lens is converging type (convex).

Q.22. The power of a lens is – 0.4 D. Find its nature and focal length.
Sol. Here, power of lens (P) = – 0.4 D
Focal length (f ) = ?

We know that, P =
Light : Reflection and Refraction 401

or f =

Negative sign shows that the lens is concave (diverging).

Q.23. The focal length of a concave lens is 0.5 cm. Find its power with appropriate sign.
Sol. Here,
Focal length (f ) = – 0.5 m
Power of lens (P) = ?

We know that, P =

Q.24. A lens has been prepared by fusion of two lenses of power –2.5 D and +3.5 D. Find the
combined power of the lens. The fusion lens will be a converging lens or diverging lens.
Sol. Here,
The power of first lens (P1) = –2.5 D
The power of second lens (P2) = + 3.5 D
Total power of fused lens (P) = P1 + P2
= –2.5 D + 3.5 D = 1.0 D
As the power of the fusion lens is positive. So, this lens will be convex lens.

IMPORTANT EXPERIMENTAL QUESTIONS/ACTIVITIES

Experiment 1. To study the characteristics of image formation by two surfaces of a spoon.

Requirement : A metal spoon preferably of stainless steel.
Procedure :
(i) Take a large shiny spoon in your hand.
(ii) Try to view your face in its curved surface.
(iii) Observe the image.
Observation-1 : It is larger in size and erect.
(iv) Move the spoon slowly away from your face. Observe the image.
Observation-2 : The image becomes smaller and is inverted.
(v) Reverse the spoon and repeat the activity. Observe the image.
Observation-3 : The image is always smaller and erect.
Result : (a) The curved surface of the spoon behaves as a concave mirror which mostly form an inverted
and small image except when the object is placed between F and P, when the image formed is erect, enlarged
and virtual.
(b) The bulging surface of the spoon behaves as a convex mirror which always forms a virtual, erect and
small image.
402 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Experiment 2. To find out approximate focal length of a concave mirror and to study its effect
when the source of rays is the sun.
Requirement : A sheet of paper, a concave mirror.
Procedure : (i) Hold a concave mirror in your hand and direct its reflecting surface towards the sun.
(ii) Direct the light reflected by the mirror on to a sheet of paper held close to the mirror.
(iii) Move the sheet of paper back and forth gradually until you find on the paper sheet, sharp spot of
light.
(iv) Hold the mirror and the paper in the same position for a few minutes and observe.
Observation : The sheet of paper start burning where the sharp spot of light was present.
Conclusion : The rays of light parallel to the principal axis meet at a point, the point is known as focus
(seen as a sharp spot of light). When whole energy of rays was collected at focus, temperature was raised to
ignition temperature of the paper which started burning.
Experiment 3. To study the process of image formation for different positions of the object by a
concave mirror.
Requirement : A concave mirror, a mirror stand, a chalk and a burning candle.
Procedure :
(i) Take a concave mirror, find its focal length as described in experiment 2 and note down the value of
focal length.
(ii) Mark a line on the table with a chalk. Place the concave mirror on a stand. Place the stand over the
line such that its pole lies over the line.
(iii) Draw two more lines perpendicular to the previous line such that the distance between the two lines is
equal to the focal length of the mirror. These lines correspond to the positions of the points P, F and C.
(iv) Keep the burning candle beyond C. Place a paper screen and move it in front of the mirror till you
get a sharp bright image of the candle flame on it.
(v) Observe the image carefully and note down its nature, position and relative size.
(vi) Repeat the experiment by placing the candle at different positions.
(vii) Note down and tabulate your observations.
(viii) In one case you will not get the image on screen. Identify the position of the object in such a case.
Observation : Most of the time the concave mirror forms real, inverted image on screen except one,
when the object is placed between F and P. In this case the image is highly magnified, erect and virtual.
Conclusion/Result :
Table : Image formation by a concave mirror for different positions of the object
Position of the object Position of the image Size of the image Nature of the image
At infinity At the focus F Highly diminished, Real and inverted
point-sized
Beyond C Between F and C Diminished Real and inverted
At C At C Same size Real and inverted
Between C and F Beyond C Enlarged Real and inverted
At F At infinity Highly enlarged Real and inverted
Between P and F Behind the mirror Enlarged Virtual and erect
Light : Reflection and Refraction 403

Experiment 4. To study the formation of image by a convex mirror.

Requirement : Convex mirror, a pencil.
Procedure : (i) Take a convex mirror. Hold it in one hand.
(ii) Hold a pencil in the upright position in the other hand.
(iii) Observe the image of the pencil in the mirror and note the following :
Is the image erect or inverted ?
Is it diminished or enlarged ?
(iv) Move the pencil away from the mirror slowly. Does the image become smaller or larger ?
(v) Repeat the activity carefully.
Observation : (i) The image formed is erect.
(ii) The image formed is diminished.
(iii) When the pencil is moved away from the mirror, the image becomes smaller and smaller.
Result/Conclusion : The convex mirror always forms an erect, diminished, virtual image behind the
mirror.
Experiment 5. To study the formation of image by a plane mirror.
Requirement : A plane mirror, a concave mirror.
Procedure : (i) Observe the image of a distant object in plane mirror. Could you see a full length
image ?
(ii) Try with plane mirrors of different sizes.
(iii) Repeat the activity with a concave mirror.
Did the mirror show full length image of the object ?
(iv) Try with a convex mirror.
Did the mirror show full length image of the object ?
Observation : (i) Full length image is not seen a plane mirror of small size. It is observed only when the
mirror size is equal to the size of the body.
(ii) The concave mirror forms image only when the object is at C.
(iii) The convex mirror forms a diminished full image of the object.
Experiment 6. Why does a coin put at the
bottom of a bucket filled with water appear Eye
raised?
Requirement : A coin, a bucket full of water.
Procedure : (i) Place a coin at the bottom of
a bucket filled with water. Rarer medium
(ii) Try to pick up the coin from one side.
(iii) Repeat the activity.
Do you succeed ?
Observation : The coin seem to be raised. Denser medium
Result/Conclusion : It is because of refraction
of light that the coin seem to be raised. The light
rays coming from a denser medium into a rarer
Fig. 10.21 : Refraction of coin in water
medium move away from the normal.
404 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Experiment 7. You are given with a bowl, water and a coin. Show the phenomenon of refraction of
light.
Requirement : A steel bowl, a coin, water, table, etc.
Procedure : (i) Place the large shallow bowl on a table and put a coin in it.
(ii) Move away slowly from the bowl. Stop when the coin just disappears from your sight.
(iii) Then, ask your friend to pour water gently into the bowl without disturbing the coin.
(iv) Keep looking for the coin from your position.
Does the coin becomes visible again from your position ?

Eye

Beaker

Coin

Fig. 10.22 : Refraction of coin in water

Observation : Yes, the coin becomes visible again.

Result/Conclusion : This is because of the phenomenon of refraction of light. What we observe is the
image of the coin and not the coin itself.
Experiment 8. To study the phenomenon of refraction of light with the help of a glass slab.
Requirement : Glass slab, paper sheet, a pen/pencil.
Procedure : (i) Draw a thick straight line in ink, over a sheet of white paper placed on a drawing board.
(ii) Place a glass slab over the line in such a way that one of its edges make an angle with the line.
(iii) Look at the position of the line under the slab from sides.
Does the line under the glass slab appear to be bent at the edges ?
Observation 1. Yes.
(iv) Place the glass slab such that it is normal to the line.
Does the part of the line under the glass slab appear bent ?
Observation 2. No
(v) Now look at the line from top of the glass slab.
Does the part of the line, beneath the slab, appear to be raised ?
Observation 3. Yes
Why does this happen ?
Because of phenomenon of refraction of light.
Experiment 9. To show the path of light through a rectangular glass slab.
Requirement : Glass slab, white sheet of paper, alpins, drawing board.
Procedure : (i) Fix a sheet of white paper on a drawing board.
(ii) Place a rectangular glass slab over the sheet of paper in the middle.
Light : Reflection and Refraction 405

(iii) Draw outline of glass slab with the help of a pencil and name it ABCD.

(iv) Take four alpins and fix two pins say E and F vertically in such a way that the line joining the pins
is inclined to the edge AB.
(v) Look for the images of pins E and F through the opposite edge. Fix two other pins, say G and H in
such a way that these two pins and the images of E and F lie on a straight line.
(vi) Remove the pins and the slab.
(vii) Then join the positions of tip of the pins E and F. Extend the line up to AB to the point O.
(viii) Join the positions of tip of pins G and H and extend it to meet CD at O.
(ix) Join O and O.
(x) Extend EF up to P as by dotted line.
Observation : The incident ray when enters into the glass slab refracted from its path.
Result : The refraction is due to change in the speed of light when it enters from one transparent
medium into another.
The experiment also proves that refraction of light occurs according to certain laws.
Experiment 10. To study the converging activity of the convex lens.
Requirement : A convex lens, a sheet of paper.
Procedure :
(i) Hold a convex lens in your hand and direct it towards the sun.
(ii) Focus the light from the sun on a sheet of paper. Obtain a sharp bright image of the sun.
(iii) Hold the paper and the lens in the same position for a while. Keep observing the paper.
What happened and why ?
Observation :
(i) Image of the sun was formed on the paper in the form of a point.
(ii) The rays of light coming from the sun were converged to a point on the paper screen.
(iii) The paper started burning at the image site.
Conclusion : The convex lens is a converging lens, it converges the rays of light to a point known as
focus of lens.
406 Deepak Science— X [HR.]

Experiment 11. To study the process of image formation by a convex lens for different positions of
the object.
Requirement : A convex lens, a lens stand, a paper screen.
Procedure :
(i) Take a convex lens. Find its approximate focal length.
(ii) Draw five parallel lines using chalk on a table so that the distance between successive lines is equal
to the focal length of the lens.
(iii) Place the lens on a lens stand and place it on the central line such that the optical centre of lens lies
over the line.
(iv) The two lines on either side of the lens correspond to F and 2F.
(v) Place a burning candle far beyond 2F to the left.
Obtain a clear sharp image on a screen on the opposite side of the lens.
(vi) Note down the nature, position and relative size of the image.
(vii) Repeat this activity by placing object just behind 2F, at 2F, between F and 2F, at F, between F
and O.
(viii) Note down and tabulate your observations.
Observation and Result : For conclusion, please see answers of Q.2 and Q.4 of Essay-Type Question.
Experiment 12. To study the formation of image by a concave lens.
Requirement : A concave lens, a candle, paper screen, lens stand, etc.
Procedure : (i) Take a concave lens and place it on a lens stand.
(ii) Place a burning candle on one side of the lens.
(iii) Look through the lens from other side of the lens and observe the image.
(iv) Try to get the image on screen.
(v) Note down the nature, relative size and approximate position of the image.
Observation : The image formed is small, erect, virtual and on the same side of the lens.
(vi) Move the candle away from the lens.
Note the change in the size of the image what happens to the size of the image when the candle is placed
too far away from the lens.
Observation : The size of the image become highly diminished, ultimately it forms a point image at the
focus.

